Home

Call up the operation display.

Contents

1. Use the 3 A V 7 A W buttons to determine the Threshold mini mum level at which compression starts and Gain level of com pressed signal at three separate frequency bands These values offset those of the frequency curve settings in step 6 Press the I SAVE button to call up the display for saving your origi nal Master Compressor settings Use the 3 A W 6 A V buttons to select the destination for saving the Master Compressor settings MIXING CONSOLE OICE V FILTER FFI USER MASTER COMPRESSOR page 69 dure as in step 4 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual DO Ee CH dea Sch sl e 10 eC CO 1 O Press the I SAVE button to save the Master Compressor settings When recalling the saved Master Compressor settings use the same proce Voice Creating Voice Set The instrument has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices Once you ve created a Voice you can save it as a User Voice to the USER USB display for future recall The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other Voices Basic Procedure N BOQ A Select the desired Voice other than an Organ Flutes Voice page 32 Press the 6 A VOICE SET button to call up the VOICE SET display
2. computer monitor Convenient Functions for Karaoke Adjusting the tempo gt page 31 Transpose gt See below Applying Effects to Your Voice gt See below Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice gt page 57 Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch Vocal CueTIME gt page 142 Transpose You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low e Transposing the Song key up Press the TRANSPOSE button e Transposing the Song key down Press the TRANSPOSE button e Resetting the transposition s s s Press the TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously EXIT TRANSPOSE MASTER f Ea lt M TRANSPOSE 1 RESET S Applying Effects to Your Voice You can also apply various effects to your voice 1 can up the operation display FUNCTION gt G MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY 2 Press the 4 A W 5 A V buttons to turn the effect on BIG Selecting an effect type You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console page 92 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice You can also automatically apply various harmony vocals to your voice 1 select a Song which contains chord data page 35 If the Song contains this data the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not 2 call up the operation display
3. Ga Press the 4 A W button to select the whole note length 9 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard Press the SONG STOP button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song 1 12 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display If you want you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner page 158 13 14 Press the F EXPAND button to convert the input chord change data into the Song data Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 Recording Your Performance A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted page 150 Entering fill ins Turn the STYLE CONTROL AUTO FILL IN button to ON and simply press one of the STYLE CONTROL MAIN VARI ATION A B C D buttons The appropriate fill in section plays and then automatically goes to the selected MAIN VARIATION A B C DU pattern playback CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 157 s8u0s sunipy pue Bunea Suter Recording Your Performance Editing a Recorded Song You can edit the Songs you ve recorded with any rec
4. 2 Press one of the A J buttons to select a bank REGISTRATION BANK imam REGIST DELETE SAVE K NAME COPY PASTE 3 Press one of the green lit numbered buttons 1 8 in the Registra tion Memory section Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls in other words instead of via Registration Memory One Touch Setting Music Finder Song or incoming MIDI data etc Call up the Parameter Lock display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB lt 4 CONFIG 1 gt B 3 PARAMETER LOCK Select the desired parameter by using the 1 A W 7 A W buttons then lock it with the 8 A button 132 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup Naming a Panel Setup The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY REGIST BANK but tons to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display Press one of the A J buttons to select a bank to be edited 3 Press the 8 W EDIT button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Dis play Edit the panel setups e Deleting a panel setup Press the 5 W button to delete a panel setup page 71 e Renaming a panel setup Press the 1 W button to rename a panel setup page 72 The number above the file name
5. Japanese EUC Japanese Shift JIS CONTROL MENU ES Tasal CANCEL EA a a a a Lv J E E LJ L E 1 4 5 6 7 8 Iouiaiul BY 0 p2 11q BAOUIAR D ay BuI2auu0O7 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 183 Operations in the Special Website 6 To execute the setting press the 3 A ENTER button To cancel press the 3 Y CANCEL button 7 To actually apply all settings changed in the Internet Settings display press the 7 A W SAVE button To cancel press the 8 A W CANCEL button INTERNET SETTING prowser Es Eamgeserast os Y Home page Yamaha Website 1 Set current page as Home Register H l Restore default Home Initialize Show images On el Time zone U K time GMT GONTROD MENT Encode Selects the character code encoding for the browser Home Page Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page Set current page as Home For details refer to Changing the Home Page on page 186 Restore Default Home Restores the home page setting Show images Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to on Image data is not shown when this is set to off Time zone This determines the time zone setting for the browser LAN Both the wired LAN and wireless LAN need to be set in this display Make a
6. P SE DSP VARIATION OFF HARMONY ECHO et TYPE SELECT VOICE EFFECT PART LEFT MONO DSP HOLD POLY DSP VARIATION v v v v Use the buttons at the lower right part of the display to apply effects to the Voices Effect Parameters LEFT HOLD This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are released Non decaying voices such as strings are held continuously while decay type voices such as piano decay more slowly as if the sustain pedal has been pressed HARMONY ECHO The Harmony Echo types are applied to the right hand Voices page 87 MONO POLY This determines whether the part s Voice is played monophonically only one note at a time or polyphonically Using the MONO mode lets you play single lead sounds such as brass instruments more realistically It also lets you expressively control the Portamento effect depending on the selected Voice by playing legato DSP DSP VARIATION With the digital effects built into the instrument you can add ambience and depth to your music in a variety of ways such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall e The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP Digital Signal Processor effect on or off for the currently selected keyboard part e The DSP Variation switch is used to change between variations of the DSP effect You could use this while you play for example to ch
7. e Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over e Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench Using it as a tool or step adder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury e Only one person should sit on the bench at a time in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury f the bench screws become loose due to extensive long term use tighten them periodically using the included tool Saving and backing up your data e The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument Save the data to the USER tab display page 26 USB storage device USB flash memory floppy disk etc e Recorded Edited Songs page 42 143 158 e Created Edited Styles page 117 e Edited Voices page 99 e Memorized One Touch Settings page 51 e Edited MIDI settings page 200 Moreover the above mentioned data can be saved all at once Refer to page 76 Data in the USER tab display page 26 may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation Save important data to a USB storage device USB flash memory floppy disk etc CD When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page
8. Instrument UM E Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard MIDI receive S maan OO e SI Instrument AAA ANA MIDI IN SBS MIDI Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compati bility whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CGP 1000 and whether or not the CGP 1000 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer Depending on the MIDI device or data char acteristics you may be able to play back the data with out any problem or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back If you run into problems playing back data please refer to the information below Sequence Formats Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different systems referred to as sequence formats Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the Song data matches that of the MIDI device The CGP 1000 is compatible with the following formats SMF Standard MIDI file This is the most common sequence format Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types Format 0 or Format 1 Many MIDI devices are compati ble with Format 0 and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0 e The CGP 1000 is compatible with bo
9. VOICE SET JazzDraw TT 4 FOOTAGE VIBRATO When selecting ORGAN TYPE gt the EFFECT EQ E nae tab display SS Casse e e e ia 3 b V A If you select the EFFECT EQ tab display use the A B buttons to select the parameter to be edited 5 Use the A D F H and 1 A W 8 A W buttons to edit the Voice 6 Press the I SAVE button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice page 69 Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET ORGAN FLUTES displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 103 The Organ Flutes parameters are organized into three different pages The parameters in each page are described separately below These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters page 106 which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected FOOTAGE VOLUME ATTACK common parameters ORGAN TYPE Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated Sine or Vintage ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes see EFFECT EQ DSP TYPE parameter on page 103 and the Voice Effect DSP page 103 is turned on this parameter has the same effect as the Voice Effect VA
10. VOICE RIGHT ier Honky Tonk Natural Natural E GrandPiano2 Oct Pianol Natural Natural BrightPiano Oct Piano2 EZ MellowPiano Ka Harpsichord E RockPiano IS Kee 2 a c Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up the relevant setting display For information on the available parameters see the Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays on page 100 VOICE SET GrandPianol 2 LEFT PEDAL SOFT piji i I FILTER ATUDE pMOD 1 FMOD AMOD AMOD As necessary use the A B buttons to select the item parameter to be edited Use the 1 A W 8 A W buttons to edit the Voice Press the D COMPARE button to compare the sound of the edited Voice with the unedited Voice Press the I SAVE button to save your edited Voice page 69 Voice Creating Voice Set Editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices compared to other Voices For instructions on editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices see page 103 S z a Q g S Si ga Di J a m 5 oa S S R Ahh CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings the settings will be lost If you wish to store the settings here make sure
11. UTILITY OWNER NAME LANGUAGE ENGLISH MAIN PICTURE Default ka BACKUP E RESTORE LANGUAGE ae v VERSION EA a a a a a a CH EI ev ee E 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 Display Settings Adjusting the Contrast of the Display You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the LCD CONTRAST knob located to the left of the display USB We CO USER A CJF PART ON OFF S UC G ODUALIrIGHTa c A D H O SPLIT LEFT D i aA d 120 C7 1 HI NewSong bh FUNCTION oO T OD NewBank DIRECT ACCESS mes SS r a EXIT INTERNET BALANCE 5 100 100 MIXING COMSOL P DATA ENTRY J SONG STYLE LEFT RIGHT _RIGHT2 PART CHANNEL ON OF ENTER cO Cd Display Settings Adjusting the Brightness of the Display Adjust the brightness of the display 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 2 uoonponu 2 Press the 2 A W button to adjust the brightness of the display UTILITY VOICE CATE IN OPTIONS OPEN amp SELECT DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER OFF DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO ON POPUP DISPLAY TIME 3 0sec LCD BRIGHTNESS Gm SPEAKER ifm ESZ e gt b EE L a l
12. FUNCTION gt G MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY 3 Press the 6 A W 7 A V buttons to turn the harmony vocals Vocal Harmony on TALK OFF CH L 1 MIC EFFECT OFF C VOCAL HARMONY ON c _ VOCAL HARMONY TYPE dem CL E MIC EFFECT VOCAL HARMONY A Press the H button to call up the Vocal Harmony selection display 5 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type For details on the Vocal Harmony types refer to the separate Data List Je CountryQuar ei Std Duet ES cisdMenQuar__ ES ie MixAcapQuar ei ClosedChoir ENI WomenChoir Jee Girl Duet EN JazzSisters KO SpdyMouse 6 Press the ACMP ON OFF button to turn on Auto Accompaniment 7 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button and sing into the microphone The harmony is applied to your voice according to the chord data CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 57 Adjusting the microphone and Song volume page 40 You can adjust the volume balance between the Song playback and the microphone 1 Call up the Main display DIRECT ACCESS EXIT BIT The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display If the Balance display is not indicated press the EXIT button 2 To adjust the microphone volume press the 4 A W button To adjust the Song volume press the 1 A W button Convenient Functions for Singing Alo
13. Press the DIRECT ACCESS button then press the EXIT button to return to the Main display and confirm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence pro grammed above e Use the TAB gt button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the order of the sequence or use the TAB Tal button to call them up in reverse order The TAB Tal gt buttons can only be used for Registration Sequence when the Main display is called up e When pedal operation has been set in step 3 you can use a pedal to select the Registration Memory numbers in order The pedal can be used for Reg istration Sequence no matter which display is called up except for the dis play in step 3 above TRANSPOSE BAR 001 The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display letting you confirm the currently selected number Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence SEQUENCE END are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence save the current Registration Memory Bank file Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY REGIST BANK but tons to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display 2 Press the 6 W button to save the Bank file page 69 Ah CAUTION Settings in the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE display are au
14. mini man ual complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you ese 90000 00000000 0005 Le S ooo a 1 select the desired Language 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJJUTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt OWNER 2 Press the 44 W 5 A V buttons to select the desired language OWNER NAME 1 LANGUAGE ENGLISH MAIN PICTURE Default BACKUP ke seen LANGUAGE kee Map 2 Press the DEMO button to start the Demos Demos will play back continuously until DEMO stopped 4 3 Press the EXIT button to stop the Demo playback When the Demo stops the display returns Set to the MAIN display page 65 4 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 23 eo OS ee 2 P Showing Specific Demo Topics 1 Press the 7 A V 8 A V buttons in the Demo display to call up the specific Demo menu a 2 Press one of the A I buttons to show a specific Demo To return back to the previous display press the J button THome Studio Sound Showcase Internet Sery Bigle Slemeres Iaeegus eegen 5 What is Registration Memory 6 USB Audio Recorder 1 RE 2 What is Song Creator 3 What is Style Creator d What is Voice Set When the Demo has
15. 20 C 5 8 D O O 186 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Operations in the Special Website Initializing Internet Settings The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize operation of the instrument Internet settings must be initialized separately as explained here Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the browser but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays except for the cookies and bookmarks including those related to Internet connec tion Press the 5 W SETTING button to call up the Internet Settings dis play 2 Press the TAB gt button to select the OTHERS tab 3 Press the 1 A W A V button to select Initialize INTERNET SETTING BROWS Ku E E OTHERS Proxy server Proxy port 8080 Non proxy server Delete cookies Delete J Delete all bookmarks Initialize setup Initialize Connect information Display Information CONTROD TEND TI GI GI sl GIG GI 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 4 Use the 2 A W 3 A V EDIT buttons to initialize the Internet set tings Delete cookies bookmarks Cookies and bookmarks are still remain after executing the initialize oper ation above To delete the cookies or bookmarks use the appropriate operations in the OTHERS tab display page
16. CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 77 Reference N D 2 iS gt a0 Si Lu Ki bei a0 G bei D g L oD o 78 Using Creating and Editing Voices MegaVoices Compatibility MegaVoices are unique to the Clavinova and are not compati ble with other models Any song style data you ve created on the Clavinova using the MegaVoices will not sound properly when played back on other instru ments CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing NIE Playing the Piano Voice Elte Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name Natural These rich and luscious Voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts They also take full advantage of Yamaha s advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling Dynamic Sampling Sustain Sampling and Key off Sampling S Articulation The Super Articulation voices sound remarkably authentic and natural featuring the unique performance characteristics of each instrument for example guitar scratching sounds or the legato phrasing of wind instruments They provide many of the same benefits as the MegaVoices see below but with greater playability and expressive control in real time To effectively play these natural sounds in performance of certain voices you may need to use the p
17. DELETE CANCEL 1 Change the type of character by pressing the 1 A button e If you select a language other than Japanese as the Language page 63 the following different types of characters are available CASE vssvsthssiohvaavistes Alphabet capital letters half size numbers half size marks half size e Alphabet lowercase letters half size numbers half size marks half size e If you select Japanese as the Language page 63 the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered pe kana kan Hiragana and Kanji marks full size HH kana Katakana normal size marks full size pt kanal Katakana half size marks half size A B Curunen Alphabet capital and small letters full size num bers full size marks full size ABC wes sstbssnucsitavradies Alphabet capital and small letters half size num bers half size marks half size 2 Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired position 3 Press the 2 A W 6 A W and 7 A buttons corresponding to the character you wish to enter For details on entering characters refer to the following section below instruction step 4 CASE ICON Several different characters are assigned to each button and the characters change each time you press the button 4 Press the 8 A OK button to actually enter the new name and return to the previous display
18. Entering letters numerals and symbols can be done by moving the cursor or pressing one of the character entry buttons Alternately you can wait for a short time and the characters will be entered automatically e Deleting characters Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the DATA ENTRY dial and press the 7 W DELETE button To delete all charac ters on the line at once press and hold the 7 W DELETE button e Entering special character marks Japanese and Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the 6 W button before actual entry of the character e Entering marks 1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor press the 6 W button to call up the mark list 2 Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired mark then press the 8 A OK button Depending on the display for character entry you are working in some types of characters can not be entered uonesado aiseg Even if you select Japanese as the Language when you enter the characters in the lyrics editing display page 166 the Internet Setting display page 183 or website the type of characters CASE case may be entered The following half size marks cannot be entered for a file folder name Viren gt Entering password or WEP key of wireless LAN connection in the website those characters are converted to In the case of ch
19. Glossary of Internet Terms on page 188 For information on the parameters in the tab dis plays refer to the tab names in this index Panel Button Chart The position of the button on the panel can be confirmed by the Panel Control page 12 Symbol M HII TEMPO eege EE MAIN VARIATION IAIBIICHID H H TRANSPOSE cscasvessesntasaredescasasuaiesevsseavacgueeasconess O MASTER COE IIVEL sccscessesdseseseth pepsin ssisitabehevedonerRaeteetivne IMEMORNT e Number Mic signal over Jampes n MIXING CONSOLE sscsssssesssssesesssesesssesesssssesssseesssseesssseesess e MA ONE TOUCH SETTING nn IMUSIC FINDER enee adden 1 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY Ei K IS cc EE e O A Se EE ON OFF METRONOMEI 5 ACMP ON OFF sidecsstacesnscsassdsatsncagcseniactnsetencnetiactanrenase LOTS HINKE e ener E r E EE e AUTO TEEN hi KO EE Ei P B PIANO RESET sessssssssssssssssssesssssscesssssesesssssseesssssseessssseesseses k Weg PLAY PAUSE amp wcosinssazcersnsoriassunsevnurncenveetoocionosnesmmnnses e IBREAK ironista Eeende bereede POWER osssessssessssessssessseessseessseesssessssesssussssecssseessseessseessseesss C R CHANNEL ON OFF nn PREG anena a deeg eege 37 REGIST BANK Elte ees D FI GE KEE SEENEN REWI FF buttons ccscsccescsssesesssesesssesesssseesssseesssseesssseensss k Damper Deel ees eer geiert unt eet DATA EE EE e S IDEMO e e e a thant 4 E EI ge e 22 Ce
20. Quick Guide Basic Operation Reference Using Creating and Editing Voices Using Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Using Creating and Editing Songs Using a Microphone Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Appendix CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 9 Enhanced Realism and Natural Expressiveness Authentic Acoustic Piano like Touch NW Natural Wood with Synthetic ivory keytops The CGP 1000 is one of a new breed of instruments that features a keyboard with the feel of real ivory The special Natural Wood keyboard of the CGP 1000 uses real wood white keys The key surface is soft and slightly porous giving the keys added grip and a natural friction that lets you play easily The authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic keyboards it makes you feel as if you re playing a real grand piano This specially crafted keyboard lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper pedal or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally E be Q 3 ge e 5 E The Acoustic Ambience of a Grand Piano with the iAFC Feature This Clavinova features the groundbreaking technologies of the Hybrid Activ
21. Quick Recording Multi Recording Step Record ing Song Editing Record Channels 16 USB Audio Recorder YES 214 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual CGP 1000 LAN Port Wireless Game Adaptor LAN Port External Adaptor via USB to DEVICE Internet Direct Connection USB Flash Memory YES Floppy Disk 2HD 2DD External Adaptor via USB to DEVICE GE Hard Disk External Adaptor via USB to DEVICE Flash Memory Internal about 3 2 MB Memory Card SmartMedia etc External Adaptor via USB to DEVICE Tempo Range 5 500 Tap Tempo Tempo Metronome YES Sound Bell on off Human Voices 5 Languages Registration Memory S Regist Sequence Freeze YES Demo YES 6 Languages English Japanese German Language for Display French Spanish Italian Direct Access YES SES Pi Reset Butt iano Reset Button incl Piano Lock YES Transpose Keyboard Song Master Scale Type 9 USB to HOST Computer M Ge JSB TO DEVICE YES left side of front panel USB TO DEVICE bottom left panel of the instrument YES PHONES x 2 MIDI THRU OUT IN AUX PEDAL AUX IN L L R R AUX OUT Other Connectors L L R R AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED L R MIC INPUT VOLUME MIC LINE IN VIDEO OUT RGB OUT LAN VOLUME SUSTAIN SOSTENUTO SOFT Pedals Functions GLIDE S Articulation SONG PLAY PAUSE STYLE START STOP etc iAFC YES Amplifiers 60W X2 60W X2 Amplifier
22. Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via which the selected part will be transmitted You can also determine the types of data to be sent With the exception of the two parts below the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual e UPPER The keyboard part played on the right side of the key board from the Split Point for the Voices RIGHT1 and or 2 e LOWER The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices This is not affected by the on off status of the ACMP ON OFF button Tx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel 1 16 flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the chan nel s 2 NOTE When different parts are assigned to the same transmit channel If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the con nected MIDI device gt NOTE About the protected Songs Write protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1 16 are set to be transmitted E MIDI messages which can be transmitted or received recognized The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANS MIT RECEIVE display e Note Note events page 164 s CC CONTROL CHANGE csriisarssarsaresrrssa page 164 e PC PROGRAM CHANCE page 164 PB Pitch Ben page
23. Selecting percussion sounds When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the PERCUSSION amp DRUM KIT group is selected you can play various drums and percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard Details are given in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List To check which Standard Kit 1 percussion sounds are assigned to each key look at the icons printed above the keys Selecting sound effects You can play individual sound effects such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard The sound effects are categorized as GM amp XG GM2 1 Use the A B FI G RIGHT 1 buttons to select the RIGHT 1 part Press the 8 A UP button to call up the Voice categories Press the 2 A button to display page 2 Press the E F button to select GM amp XG GM2 Press the 2 A button to display page 2 Press the F button to select SoundEffect Press one of the A J buttons to select the desired sound effect Play the keyboard Selecting GM XG GM2 Voices RO For details on the Voice allocation format see page 199 You can select the GM XG GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation Perform steps 1 4 described above select the desired category then select the desired voice Playing different Voices simultaneously The instrument can play different Voices simultaneously page 79 e Layering two different Voices This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds e Setting separate Voices for th
24. nating any triplet feel However if you use the eighth note eighth note triplet setting both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized A setting of 100 pro duces exact timing If a value less than 100 is selected notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage Applying less than 100 quantization lets you preserve some of the human feel in the recording Quarter note length cb Original data e e t EE ees gt Quantizing strength 100 o D e Quantizing strength 50 _ e _ e _ __ e __e _ E Deleting the data of the specified channel DELETE menu You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song Select the channel whose data to be deleted by using the 1 A W 8 A W buttons then press the D EXECUTE button to execute the operation Recording Your Performance A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 About Quantize size resolu tion The Quantize size or resolution is the number of clocks per quar ter note CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 161 s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO L O ob Z D D Recording Your
25. on one of the A J buttons 4 Play the keyboard RO Restoring the Piano settings Press the piano shaped PIANO RESET button PIANO RESET Recalling your favorite Voices easily The instrument has a huge amount of high quality Voices covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds making it perfect for virtually every musical application However the sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming at first To easily recall your favorite Voice there are two methods Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the USER button 1 Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive Refer to page 70 for details on the copy operation 2 Call up the selection display USER F VOICE RIGHT1 2 Select the desired Voice Press one of the A J buttons to select the Voice Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons Refer to page 131 for details on Registration Memory operations CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 33 34 OO we 2 P Playing the Voice Demos To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially in context listen to the demo songs for each Voice 1 in the Voice Selection display page 33 step 3 press the 8 Y DEMO button to start the Demo for the selected Voice 2 To stop the Demo press the 8 V DEMO button again
26. B c D Km H MM TAP TEMPO TEMPO TT Start Stop Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button is pressed Intro This is used for the beginning of the song Each preset Style features three different intros When the intro finished play ing accompaniment shifts to the Main section see Main in the During Style playback below Press one of the INTRO I III buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to start Style playback Synchro Start This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard Press the SYNC START button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard to start Style playback Tap Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed Simply tap press release the TAP TEMPO button four times for a 4 4 time signature and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped BEGG The particular drum sound and the velocity loudness of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt CONFIG 1 B 4 TAP Fade In For information on the settings see page 191 RO For details on setting the fade in and fade out time see page 109 CGP 100
27. C types produce maximum effect E DYNAMICS This changes the velocity volume or accent of certain notes in the Style playback The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected Style CHANNEL Selects the desired channel part to which Dynamics is to be applied ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied in other words which notes in the part s are emphasized with the Dynamics settings STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type above will be applied The higher the value the stronger the effect EXPAND COMP Expands or compresses the range of velocity values Values higher than 100 expand the dynamic range while values lower than 100 com press it BOOST CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section channel Values above 100 boost the overall velocity while values below 100 reduce it Style Creator CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 125 s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Buea Suen Style Creator Editing Data for Each Channel CHANNEL The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of Basic Operation for Editing Styles page 123 Press the A B button to select the edit menu see below STYLE CREATOR Classic8Beat J basic M Assempry GROOVE CHANNEL CHANNEL RHYTHM2 Bar 1 A i i REC F L_J 2 VELOCITY CHA
28. CHORD SETTING FINGERING TYPE ROOT TYPE v HAE H a LJ GJ GJ LJ GyJ 4 5 6 d 8 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 107 N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt e 5 ka o E S D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob c lt 7 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style Al Artificial Intelligence Starting the rhythm with Sync Start You can also start the rhythm simply by playing the keyboard if Sync Start is enabled turn on the SYNC START button The rhythm does not sound for the Pianist Styles or other similar Styles When you want to use any of these Styles always make sure that ACMP ON OFF is turned on 108 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual SINGLE FINGER Makes it simple to produce orchestrated accompani iW ment using major seventh minor and minor seventh II chords by pressing a mini Im II For a major chord press the root key only simultaneously press the rooi mum number of keys on the key and a black key to its left Chord section of the key board This type is available only for Style playback The abbreviated chord fin gerings described atright are Cm7 ZER ee or a minor seventh chord used LI Mi H simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left For a seventh chord simultaneously press
29. Clears the text from the display the text data itself is not erased Determines the text type fixed or proportional and font size Opens the Text selection display Allows changing of the background picture of the text display as in the Lyrics display described above The background setting is common for both the Lyr ics display and Text display BEG e The text file which is copied in the USER tab can be showed e Line feed or carriage return is not automatically performed in the instrument If a sentence is not displayed in its entirety because of limitations in the screen space execute the line feed on your computer e When the background color is specified in the song data the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 55 56 Displaying the lyrics text on an external TV video or computer monitor The lyrics text indicated on the display can also be output via the VIDEO OUT RGB OUT terminal l Use an appropriate cable to connect the VIDEO OUT RGB OUT con nector of the instrument to the video input connector on the TV computer monitor 4 PAL or RGB used by your video equipment if necessary C _ 1 Call up the operation display TV monitor FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt SCREEN OUT 2 Press the 1 A W button to select the external television video or com puter monitor signal Set the external television video or computer monitor signal NTSC E
30. E 5 N 3 gt D I E o 200 MIDI Settings MIDI Settings In this section you can make MIDI related settings for the instrument The instrument gives you a set of ten pre programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your particu lar MIDI application or external device Also you can edit the pre programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to the USER display You can then save all these original templates as a single file to USB storage devices in the MIDI SETUP selection dis play called up by pressing FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB gt SYSTEM RESET Basic Operation Call up the operation MIDI template selection display Function I MIDI MIDI vm Accord _ RAFAT Parts EI l ken amp sryLe US vm Accora2 l Master xeo UI vm Predan song le vm redaz clock Ext vm orr 2 To use the pre programmed templates or to edit them Press the TAB lt 4 button to select the PRESET dis play Press one of the A J buttons to select a MIDI template To use the templates already saved to the USER display or to edit them Press the TAB gt button to select the USER display Press one of the A J buttons to select a MIDI tem plate 3 To edit a template press the 8 W EDIT but ton to call up the MIDI display for editing The individual parameters settin
31. RIGHT1 2 and LEFT with the excep tion of Song parts KBD amp STYLE Basically the same as All Parts with the exception of how keyboard parts are man aged The right hand parts are handled as UPPER instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the left hand part is handled as LOWER Master KBD In this setting the instrument functions as a master keyboard playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices such as a computer sequencer Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1 16 This is used to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer Clock Ext MIDI Accord 1 Playback Song or Style synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instru ment internal clock This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instrument MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass chord buttons of the accordion This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the left hand buttons MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as MIDI Accord1 above with the exception that the chord bass notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you pla
32. S CC S e VOCAT TARMIONY H D MIC SETTING 1 oO oD E J C o 2 TALK MIC EFFECT VOCAL HARMONY 2 lt a SS 1 2 3 4 5 6 H 8 170 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound 3 Press the TAB Tal button to select the OVERALL SETTING tab display MICROPHONE SETTING OVERALL SETTING EO LOW EQ MID EO HIGH s y R r e RATIO OUT VOCAL HARMO VOCODER CONTROL SONG CHANNEL KBD A Use the A J buttons to select the item parameter see below to be adjusted nn Use the 1 A W 8 A V buttons to set the value 6 Press the EXIT button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis play Adjustable Items Parameters in the OVERALL SETTING Tab Display E 3BAND EQ EQ Equalizer is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response The instrument features a high grade three band LOW MID and HIGH digital equalizer function for the microphone sound e Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band e dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB E NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level This effectively cuts off extraneous noise allowing the des
33. Video Devices AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED Jacks RCA pin jacks of L and R When these are connected with RCA pin plug LEVEL FIXED the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level regardless of the MASTER VOLUME con trol setting Use these when controlling volume with an external audio system or recording the instrument s sound to an external audio system Connect the instru ment s AUX OUT L R LEVEL FIXED jacks and the AUX IN jacks of an external audio system using appro priate audio cables Instrument Stereo system oag t Pon Pin plug LEVEL FIXED DER eR Lae R Co AUX RI t Pin plug Audio cable Playing External Audio Devices with the Built in Speakers AUX IN Jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be con nected to these jacks allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the instrument s speak ers Connect the output jacks LINE OUT etc of an external synthesizer or the tone generator module and the instrument s AUX IN L L R R jacks using appro priate audio cables Instrument f Synthesizer Tone generator uu Ee Fe Dem AUX IN LINE OUT Phone plug standard Audio cable Pin plug ZN CAUTION When the sound of an external device is output to the instrument first turn on the power to the external device then to the instrument Reverse this order when you turn the power off Hi e Use only the L L
34. YAMAHA Clavinova CGP 1000 OWNER S MANUAL ae gt SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure The explanation of these graphics appears on this page Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servic ing instructions in the literature accompanying the product The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within the equilateral trian gle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclo sure that may be of sufficient magni tude to constitute a risk of electrical shock IMPORTANT NOTICE All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner all foreseeable
35. buttons to select items To cancel the operation press the I CANCEL button Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine whether the item should be registered or not by pressing the 8 A V button Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons to register your settings It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or green Buttons that are lit in red or green already contain the panel setup data Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button lamp lights in green or red will be erased and replaced by the new settings Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps 1 5 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups registration Memory When recalling registration set ups you can also select the items to be recalled or not even if you selected all items when registering page 133 About the lamp status OTR eebede no data registered On green data registered but not currently selected On red data registered and currently selected Deleting an unneeded panel setup See page 133 Deleting all eight current panel setups To delete all the eight current panel setups turn the POWER button ON while holding the B6 key right most B key on the key board CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 131 sdnjas jaueg WON Buey pue BulJa sIsay LD Si bei Si D N T S a z ie wn be
36. etc o o o MAIN VARIATION D o BREAK rss K Ka K MUSIC FINDER o Sianal Over d Kc in ln allelic o E II z Se eyamana Clavinova Q le e e g ui E If E LU RI ei wi k E Si ma Di OA P D I e ei es Le Bd Si Si KW Fe E WI SS BS ai Si WI Si WS M We E EE P 14 USB TO DEVICE Terminal P22 MASTER VOLUME dal KAS IDEMO DUO niea P 23 METRONOME O ON OFF DUHOM WEEN P 30 TRANSPOSE MEET P 56 TEMPO O TAR TEMPO buttOnennesrsi reir n e RE P 47 ERNEST TE P 31 STYLE CONTROL STYLE category selection buttons 0 eee eee P 45 ACMP ON OFF button isisisi soossissssssrsrssenosesssesiississ P 46 AUTO FILLIN buttons seet Ee cove svasassscenceedesscosepeeas P 48 INTRO M M buttons ooo eee ceeceeeereeee P 47 MAIN VARIATION A B C D buttons 00 cesses P 48 NEEN EE P 48 ENDING rit III buttons occ eeeeeeeeeereeseeneeeee P 48 SYNC STOP buten P 48 SYNG START EE P 47 START STOP butt On fi scsasicsciccvcteveccessscapeacssnssseveereateviwstes P 47 MUSIC FINDER Button SEENEN E ENEE P 52 LCD C
37. memory floppy disk etc to the instrument for use as background Make sure to use images no larger than 640 x 480 pixels If you select a picture file on the USB storage device USB flash memory floppy disk etc the background may take some time to appear If you want to reduce this time save the background from the USB drive to the USER drive of the Picture Selection display If you select a picture file on the USB drive the selected background will not be displayed when the power is turned on again unless the same media containing the data has been inserted into the drive Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Display You can have your name appear in the opening display the display that first appears when the power is turned on Clavinova 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt OWNER 2 Press the I OWNER NAME button and call up the Owner Name display Refer to page 73 for character entry details OWNER NAME 1 LANGUAGE ENGLISH MAIN PICTURE Default OWNER EE NAME LANGUAGE MAIN L Ze Ge def3 pgrs7 tuy8 wxyz9 0 emma DELETE CANCEL MESS K ia El Displaying the version number To check the version number of this instrument press the 7 A WIJ 8A V VERSION buttons in the display in step 1 above Press the EXIT button to return to the original display Handli
38. minal you cannot access the USB storage device from the com puter via the instrument Formatting USB storage media For details see page 68 Ab CAUTION Formatting a USB storage media completely erases all data on the media Make sure that the USB storage media you re formatting does not contain important data Backing up your data to a computer E Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you ve saved data to a USB storage device you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer then archive and organize the files as desired Simply recon nect the device as shown below Saves internal data to a USB storage device USB storage device USB TO DEVICE terminal Instrument M m Computer Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer Backing up data to a computer and organizing files folders E CH l Co USB storage device Computer S Instrument WU CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 195 SODIAVC JAYIO YUM JUatUNAsU INOA SUIS Kai EU D gt ov Q i Q Ss zi O E 3 D i E o E 5 N 3 gt D I E o Connecting a Computer or USB Device Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Files contained on the hard d
39. save your data Save the data in the Style Selection display page 69 Style Creator Rules when recording non rhythm channels e Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels i e C D E G A and B e Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD chan nels i e C E G and B C Chord notes Any desired chord or chord pro C R Recommended notes gression can be used for the ciric c ric INTRO and ENDING sections Using the data recorded here the auto accompaniment Style playback is appro priately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your per formance The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the Changing the Source Chord Se i If you want to record the pattern Source Chord and is set by default to CM7 as in the example illustration above with a Source Chord other than You can change the Source Chord its root and type from the PARAMETER dis CM7 set the PLAY ROOT and play on page 127 Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from a Ee the default CM7 to another chord the chord notes and recommended notes will beore Ee pag also change For details on chord notes and recommended notes see page 128 Step Recording EDIT s 3 F P A The e
40. 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 3273 YAMAHA Clavinova Web site hitp music yamaha com homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2007 Yamaha Corporation WH72810 70 APAP3 2 01A1 Printed in China
41. 1 and Left parts O DUALRIGHT2 For the selected part a RIGHT mark appears at the left of the O SPLITILEFN Voice name in the Main display 2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Left part VOICE CONTROL PIANO QO EPIANO STRINGS SOTAR O SAXOPHONE Call Ain O ORGAN WI WI HOIR PERC RGAN O TRUMPET BRASS O ACCORDION O SHAS O SYNTH amp FX O DRUM KIT O Sab II 3 Press the TAB Tal button to select the PRESET display Sa010A Supp pue Buea 2Zutsn E FrenchMusette IZ Harmonica Z Master Accord Z Accordion 2 JazzAccordion E SmallAccordion mi TangoAccordion z TuttiAccordion Z Steirisch IS Musette Accordion D wey ES A v EZ A Press one of the A J buttons to select a Voice 5 Play the keyboard 6 Press the PART ON OFF SPLIT LEFT button again to turn it off SE Split on off You can use a pedal to switch the Split on off when the PART ON OFF SPLIT LEFT is appropri ately assigned page 191 This is useful for turning the Split on and off while you play Specifying the split point the border between the right and left hand range See page 111 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 81
42. 1 part Refer to page 81 for Voice selection operations for the Left part E Dual Split Playing Three Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 2 and Left parts You can combine these three parts to create a rich ensemble sound PART ON OFF O DUALRGA ro s tmusen Right 1 part Adjusting the volume balance among parts Adjust the volume balance among the parts in the BALANCE display page 40 Specifying the split point the border between the right and left hand range See page 111 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 79 s0Ud1BJOY Sad10A Bul Ipy pue Buea SuIsA Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Right 1 and 2 Parts You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts by turning Dual on Press the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 button to play two Voices For the selected part a LEFT simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts mark appears at the right of the DUALIRIGHT2 Voice name in the Main display SPLIT LEFT 2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Right 2 part Quickly selecting Voices for Right 1 and 2 parts You can quickly select the Right VOICE CONTROL 1 and 2 part Voices just from th
43. 11 As you can see it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data page 202 The instrument also allows you to determine how the received data is played back page 203 System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system These include System Exclusive messages for transferring data unique to each instrument manufac turer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI device Message Name System Exclusive Message Operation Panel Setting Effect type settings Mixing Console etc Realtime Messages Clock setting Start stop operation The messages transmitted received by the instrument are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Imple mentation Chart in the separate Data List What You Can Do With MIDI E Record your performance data 1 16 channels using the instrument s auto accompaniment features on an external sequencer or computer with sequencer software After recording edit the data with the sequencer then play it back on the instrument MIDI receive MIDI IN gz MIDI OUT gt MIDI OUT MIDI IN E D MIDI transmit Computer or Sequencer When you want to use the instrument as an XG com patible multi timbral tone generator set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 16 to SONG in MIDI USB 1 in MIDI Receive page 203
44. 164 AT AftertOUuCh ccccceeeeeeesesesesesesesseseeeeeeees page 164 RECEIVE display MIDI Receive Settings x CHANNEL sc PC PB 3 Lk e MIDI USB1 CH2 wer Iw LY MIDI USB1 CH3 SONG wr ds MIDI USB 1 CH4 SONG we Iw w MIDI USB1 CHS SONG WW Iw wi MIDI USB1 CH6 SONG we w w MIDI USB1 CH _ SONG w w w MIDI USB1 CH8 SONG we w siutuu 12 34 5 67 8 9 10 111213 14 15 16 MIDI USBI UsB2 EH CONTROL PROGRAM PITCH AFTER NOTE CHANGE CHANGE BEND TOUCH w MARK SS SES eas E aa Cal Cal Ce CHANNEL PART wv C EC v The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 200 This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received Operation Select the channel to be received and the part via which the selected channel will be received You can also determine the types of data to be received The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels 16 channels x 2 ports by USB con nection With the exception of the two parts below the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual e KEYBOARD The received note messages control the instrument s keyboard performance e EXTRA PART 1 5 There are five parts speciall
45. 185 Sometimes cookies contain per sonal information Iouiaiul BY 0 p2 11q BAOUIAR D ay BuI2auu0O7 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 187 o C E o g E o E z e gt Ka Q oO A bei gt O gt amp o x oD C c oO o O O Glossary of Internet Terms Glossary of Internet Terms Broadband An Internet connection technology service such as ADSL and optical fiber that allows for high speed high volume data communication Browser The software used to search for access and view web pages For this instrument this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Inter net The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program in that it remembers certain information such as your user name and password so you don t have to re enter the information each time you visit the site DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses Download Transferring data over a network from a larger host system to a sma
46. 3 Press the EXIT button to close the Tempo display Set the Popup Display Time 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 2 2 Select the B 2 POPUP DISPLAY TIME button and use the 7 A W 8 A V buttons to set the time E Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB Tal CONFIG 1 gt B 2 METRONOME 2 Set the parameters by pressing the 2 A W 7 A V buttons UTILITY SCREEN OUT MEDIA TOWNER SY VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound a 1 FADE IN TIME 6 0 sec FADE OUT TIME 12 0 sec SOUND Determines which sound is used for the metronome a an eessen Bell On Conventional metronome BAJ TMESIGNATORE a a d PARAMETER LOCK sound with no bell TAP PERCUSSION HI HAT CLOSE VELOCITY 50 Bell Om Conventional metronome sound with bell English Voice Count in English German Voice Count in German Japanese Voice Count in Japanese METRONOME TIME SOUND SIGNATURE French Voice Count in French Spanish Voice Count in Spanish TIME Determines the time signature of the metronome E SIGNATURE sound J o CJ 4 5 6 7 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 31 i Playing Various Voices The instrument features a variety of Voices such as strings or wind instruments including exceptionally re
47. 6 W ALL OFF button again A Press the 7 Y OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Copy operation press the 8 W CANCEL button 5 Select the destination tab USER USB to paste the file folder by using the TAB Talk buttons 6 Press the 4 V PASTE button to paste the file folder The folder file copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order 70 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Moving Files Cut amp Paste This operation lets you cut a file and paste it to another location folder 2 Call up the display containing the file you want to move Press the 2 W CUT button to cut the file The pop up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the dis play WT Select files to be cut HES 6 the clipboard aart Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desired file To cancel the selection press the same A J button again E Selecting all files Press the 6 W ALL button to select all files indicated on the current dis play including the other pages To cancel the selection press the 6 W ALL OFF button again Press the 7 W OK button to confirm the file selection To cancel the Cut operation press the 8 W CANCEL button Select the destination tab USER USB to which the file is to be pasted by using the TAB lt gt
48. 7 page 60 For information about the operation method to change the name of the displayed file or to delete a file see the section File Folder Operations in the File Selection Dis play on page 68 However the operation that copies moves file folder to the User tab cannot be done here 3 Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the file you want to listen to then press the 8 V AUDITION button The song is played back from the beginning and the display indicates the auditioning process This display closes automatically when auditioning is stopped Press the G CANCEL or EXIT button to stop audition ing N CAUTION Avoid frequently connecting disconnecting the USB storage device or turning the power on off too often Doing so may corrupt the USB storage device data or the auditioning data BE Audio recording is processed internally so that playback volume will be appropriate when played on a computer There fore the playback sound might be distorted if you record at too high a volume In this case lower and adjust the volume of each part with Volume Balance display page 40 and the Mixing Console page 88 etc and try recording again 4 Press the EXIT button to return to the USB AUDIO RECORDER display shown in step 4 WER of Recording Your Performance as Audio above CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Basic Operation Selecting Message Language You can select the desired language of the display
49. 92mm hexagon bolts 210 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual A Remove the four base screws and ONLY those screws on the skid KL 5 Set a blanket at the left corner and slide the piano forward Securely hold the piano while doing this 8 Attach and securely tighten the left front leg with the 70mm hexagon bolts N CAUTION While removing the screws make sure to have at least two other people securely hold this board and keep it from drop ping O Attach the pedal Attach and securely tighten the screws CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 211 xipuaddy Ba D c bp bi CG ka Attach the pedal brace rods Insert the pedal brace rods into the pedal box recesses and make sure they fit securely then tighten the screws 4 0 X 20mm to attach the rods 2 Connect the AC power cord L e A SE 212 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual E After completing the assembly please check the following e Are there any parts left over Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors e Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location e Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it Tighten all screws e Is the power cord inserted securely into the sockets Che
50. Audio Recorder Spot cas Ai bbi daddd dod adda Le S ooo D p p0og Here you ll learn how to record your performance as audio data to a USB storage device For example by connecting a guitar microphone or other device to the instrument you can record an ensemble performance of guitar and key board together or record yourself singing along with Song playback The performance data is saved as a WAV file of conventional CD quality 44 1 kHz 16 bit Since it is possible to play back the file on computer a listener doesn t need to have the particular instrument in order to hear the performance This makes it possible to easily share your perfor mances and recordings with your friends via e mail record your own CDs or upload the recordings to websites for many others to enjoy as well Recording methods on the instrument include MIDI recording as well as audio recording For details about the differ ence between audio and MIDI recording see page 196 For specific instructions on MIDI recording refer to page 200 BE e In order to record your own original CD you ll need a CD R drive or compatible device Refer to the manual that came with your specific computer for details e When you attach a recorded file in an e mail message make sure the file size is small enough to be sent The following sounds can be recorded e Internal tone generator of the instrument Keyboard parts
51. BANK 4 H buttons ssessseessssesssoesseressscsssresssse P 132 MEMORY buttoni sssissccss cceasvscsassssexasancerseniasssiarcaonntea P 131 gr i8 DUROS eieren a P 131 o 58 EFC rit til uss e e Pant ON OFF d oz doc FUNCTION E INTERNET Ee Ce SONG coQ Q VOICE CONTROL eme d mec stoe n n A o RA oeo scoe ORE ooe onrem O eno O raue Osnos O GELS enee Geff O orom JOG CJ CJ ce es ee ee ee a a C IC J J 1 1 DATA ENTE a PS PERCE Se OTRUMPET BRASS O ACCORDION amp PAD_ _ OSYNTH amp FX O DRUM KIT O FLUTES 5 enter HEET SEA te o o o o o o o o CI CO CI feste CE Her o ONE TOUGH SETTING fF e Ce JAJ 1 2 ALE s fs f gt S ES a GCICIlele JC J It CH Ca eg See Ae i Re AN MN Ae Wi SI Il D M Wi IS Www L E HW Pi Sei d Wu EA n N bay R Ry A VOICE CONTROL VOICE category selecti
52. Clavinova in this Owner s Manual e The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument e The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English e Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use e This device is capable of using various types formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance As a result this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended e Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement and may not be exactly the same as the original This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights Such copyrighted materials include without lim itation all computer software style files MIDI files WAVE data musical scores and sound recordings Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws Any violation of copyright has legal consequences DON T MAKE DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES e The photos of the harpsichord bandoneon hackbrett music box dulcimer and cimbalom shown in the
53. Events Name Allows you to enter the Song name Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics Control Codes CR Enters a line break in the lyrics text LF Unavailable on the instrument On some MIDI devices this event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the next set of lyrics Inputting and Editing Lyrics 1 Use the 4A W 5 A W DATA ENTRY buttons to call up the lyrics editing display AA CAUTION Operations are the same as in the section Entering Characters page 72 The recorded Song data will 2 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for be lost H you select another saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display Song or turn the power to the 69 instrument off without exe page 69 cuting the Save operation page 69 L D I be Do DD me uw me f 5 DD Le v L O ob Z D D 166 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Using a Microphone Reference to Quick Guide pages Singing Along with Song Playback Karaoke or Your Own PerfOrtmanG s 50 cesscscccccsesessescesecseseesssesseccescscesscessesseceesseseacensvees page 54 EonpechtgrarhMtctoglEt EE page 54 Singing with the Lyrics Displayicesccscc ceeccezcs ceressceseesce ceesceseeesees page 55 Convenient Functions for Karaoke essseesessesessesessessrseserersesee page 56 AEI UNE CIOE n a O EE page 31 Man PO e a E page 50 EIERE page 56 Adding Hanmeny Vo
54. H lt 4 gt oja gt E gan 4 Press the 8 W EDIT button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT display 5 If you want to re select the Vocal Harmony type use the 1A W 2 A V buttons Or you can re select the Vocal Harmony type by pressing the 8 A W RETURN button to return to the Vocal Harmony selection display VOCAL HARMONY EDIT EFFECT TYPE MenChoir j e PARAMETER VALUE VOCODER TYPE B CHORDAL TYPE TrioAb HARM GENDER TYPE off c C LEAD GENDER TYPE off LEAD GENDER DEPTH D C LEAD PITCH CORRECT UPPER GNDR THRESH e C LOWER GNDR THRESH UPPER GNDR DEPTH LOWER GNDR DEPTH VIBRATO DEPTH EFFECT TYPE PARAMETER Ka Ka o e S Qa Q 2 ao oD c w 6 Use the 3 A W 5 A V buttons to select the parameter page 169 you want to edit Set the value of the parameter selected above CO N Ah CAUTION Press the I SAVE button to save your edited Vocal Harmony type The settings here will be lost page 69 if you change to another Vocal Harmony type or you turn the power off without executing the save operation 168 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters Editable Parameters in the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Display VOCODER TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro phone sound when the Harmony mode page 173 is set to VOCODE
55. H button before inputting each note in the Step Record display page 149 may solve the problem The tempo beat measure and music notation is not displayed correctly e Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special free tempo settings For such Song data the tempo beat measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly The note name partially obscures the note in the dis play e When several notes occur close to each other the note name may obscure the note at left The music score of the right hand left hand part is not displayed e The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the right hand and left hand parts Set RIGHT and LEFT to the appropriate channels page 39 The notation in the display is cut off with the middle of a measure starting on the next line e When all the notes of a measure cannot fit on one line the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to the next line Dotted notes are indicated as rests e This is normal sometimes dotted notes are indicated as rests Chords are not displayed e If the selected Song does not contain chord data chords are not displayed Lyrics Karaoke Lyrics are not displayed e If the selected Song does not contain lyric data lyrics are not displayed Some of the lyrics overlap each other e This happens for Songs containing many lyrics The Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed e When th
56. IE Movie amp Show at right Press one of the A J buttons to select a folder Press the 8 A UP button to call up the next highest level folder PRESET A select a page if the display has several pages When the drive contains more than ten Songs the display is divided up into several pages The page indica tions are shown at the bottom of the display Press one of the 1 A 6 A buttons to select a page 5 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Song You can also select a Song by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER button to execute 6 Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display 26 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Operation of the Function Display In the Function display you can make detailed settings In the example here well call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display 1 Press the FUNCTION button Categories of detailed settings are shown FUNCTION MENU g MASTER TUNE O DUALRIGHT2 SCALE TUNE H MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY PART ON OFF O SPLITLEFT STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT e 7 7 FUNCTION gt CHORD FINGERING ITERNET I d REGIST SEQUENCE g O J FREEZE VOICE SET DD 2 Press the D button to select the category CONTROLLER When the selected category is further divided into sub categories the tab s will be shown in the display Sy L HL gt al 2 CENTER Sostenuto 3 LEFT Soft el 4 aux Volume we
57. J button to select VOLUME 6 To raise the level of the desired channel s press the appropriate buttons 1 A W 8 A V If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE SONG CH1 8 display press the MIXING CON SOLE button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE SONG CH9 16 display If you don t know which channel s volume to raise e Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below VOICE e Look at the channel indicators which light as the Song plays back Watching these as you listen can show you which channel you wish to boost CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 37 Displaying Music Notation Score You can view the music notation of the selected Song We suggest that you read through the music notation before starting to practice BE e The instrument can display the music notation of commercially available music data or your recorded Songs e The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data As a result it may not be exactly the same as com mercially available sheet music of the same song especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes e The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes For information on creating Song data see page 143 1 select a Song page 35 2 Press the SCORE button to display the music notation RO Look through the entire score before playing back the Song Press the
58. MIX ING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different part displays The part name is indicated at the top of the display The various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following PANEL PART display STYLE PART display gt SONG CH 1 8 display gt SONG CH 9 16 display Press one of the A J buttons to select the desired parameter Use the 1 A W 8 A V buttons to set the value Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings e Saving the PANEL PART display settings Register them to Registration Memory page 131 e Saving the STYLE PART display settings Save them as Style data 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU gt B STYLE CREATOR 2 Press the EXIT button to close the RECORD display 3 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display for sav ing your data then save it page 69 e Saving the SONG CH 1 8 9 16 display settings First register the edited settings as part of the Song data SET UP then save the Song See the SONG CREATOR CHANNEL display gt SETUP item explana tion on page 162 About Parts PANEL PART In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE you can indepen dently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and LEFT SONG STYLE and MIC parts The part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the pane
59. Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved All Shook Up Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley Copyright 1957 by Shalimar Music Corporation Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co and Chrysalis Songs International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Beauty And The Beast from Walt Disney s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Lyrics by Howard Ashman Music by Alan Menken 1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Com pany Inc All Rights Reserved Used by Permission B same Mucho Kiss Me Much Music and Spanish Words by Consuelo Velazquez English Words by Sunny Skylar Copyright 1941 1943 by Promotora Hispano Americana de Musica S A Copyrights Renewed All Rights Administered by Peer International Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Blue Hawaii from the Paramount Picture WAIKIKI WEDDING Words and Music by Leo Robin and Ralph Rainger Copyright 1936 1937 Renewed 1963 1964 by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Blue Moon Words by Lorenz Hart Music by Richard Rodgers 1934 Renewed 1962 METRO GOLDWYN MAYER INC All Rights Controlled by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC Publishing and WARNER BROS PUBLICATIONS U S INC Print All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Brazil Words and Music by Ray Barroso English lyrics by S
60. One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section A D To use the OTS Link function press the OTS LINK button DMIA Setting the timing for OTS changes The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings page 110 Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups Set up the panel controls such as Voice Style effects and so on as desired Press the MEMORY button ONE TOUCH SETTING gt OD O 2 O 3 E y CO Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 4 buttons 3 A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings It is possible to save the panel settings with another file step 4 so register it in a favorite number from 1 to 4 Press the F YES button to call up the Style selection display and save the panel settings as a Style file page 69 Ab CAUTION The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 51 i Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song Music Finder If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don t know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate the convenient Music Finder function can help you out Simply select the desired music genre from among the Music Finder Records and the instrument automatically makes
61. R jack for connection with a monaural device e The instrument s MASTER VOLUME setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks 190 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Showing the Instrument s Display Con tents on an External Monitor VIDEO OUT Terminal RGB OUT Terminal Connect the instrument to an external monitor and you can have the current display contents lyrics or text files for group sing alongs and the like displayed on the TV video computer For instructions on connecting see page 56 Settings Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt SCREEN OUT 2 Select the video equipment standard NTSC PAL or RGB by using the 1A W 2A V buttons Select the con tents of the Screen Out signal the current display contents LCD or lyrics LYRICS text TEXT by using the 3A W 4A V buttons UTILITY CONFIG1Y CONTIG 29 screen our MEDIA OWNER SYSTEM RESET Select the desired output monitor type NTSC PAL or RGB MONITOR TYPE SCREEN CONTENT L L S i Le D 1 2 3 4 5 6 y 8 L 2 NOTE Set the NTSC or PAL to correspond to the standard used by your video equipment e Set the RGB to computer monitor e When LYRICS TEXT is selected as the contents of the Screen Out signal only the lyrics of the song or text f
62. SE CH C Li E CJ E C0 J Web pase has been displayed El H sp AW ENTER Z ical recreate AA HHARAAAE LJ GJ GI OJ L eae 1 2 5 6 8 You can also select and call up links by using the A J buttons Entering Characters This section explains how to enter characters within the website for inputting a password or searching for data refer to the Entering Characters on page 73 Return to the Previous Web Page To return to a previously selected web page press the 1 A W BACK button To return to the page selected before pressing the 1 A W BACK button press the 2 A Y FORWARD button ae TEE n a re D C D g v e E gt Ka O D el oO gt O E gt ae V v E S Cp C 5 8 D O O 178 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Operations in the Special Website Refreshing a Web Page Canceling Loading of a Web Page To refresh a web page to make sure you have the latest version of the page or to try reloading press the 5 A REFRESH button To cancel loading of a page if the page is taking too long to open press the 6 A STOP button Monitoring the Internet Connection Status The messages and icons at the bottom right of the Internet display indicate the current Internet connection status Message The following three messages are displayed according to the loading statu
63. SETTING dis play in step 1 as described at left to turn the keyboard guide lamps off CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 141 s8u0s sunipy pue Bunea Suter Using the Practice Function Guide For Keyboard Performance Follow lights With this function the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play page 39 Song playback pauses and waits for you to play When you play the cor rect notes Song playback continues Any key With this function you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key any key is OK in time with the rhythm Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music any key is OK and the Song playback continues For Karaoke Karao key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger while you sing along Song playback pauses waiting for you to sing Simply play a key on the keyboard any key is OK and the Song playback continues For this func tion the notes of the keyboard do not sound Vocal CueTIME This function lets you practice singing with the proper pitch Song playback pauses waiting for you to sing When you sing with proper pitch Song playback continues Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light GUIDE LAMP TIMING Press the D button in the SONG SETTING display in step 1 page 141 to select the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light JUS E
64. Song data Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG STOP button e In the case a Song to which write protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name the original file may not be in the same folder It cannot be played back unless the original file showing Prot 2 Orig at the upper left of the Song name is in the same folder In case of a Song to which write protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name the original file name may have been changed Rename the file with the original file name so that Prot 2 Orig is shown at the upper left of the Song name In case of a Song to which write protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name the file icon may have been changed Songs to which write protect has been applied cannot be played back when the file icon of the original has been changed MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL Make sure this is set to INTERNAL page 202 xipuaddy CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 207 Ra D Cc bp bi S lt Song playback stops before the Song is finished e The Guide function is turned on In this case playback is waiting for the correct key to be played Press the GUIDE button to turn off the guide function The Song last selected before turning off the power is no longer available e If t
65. System Setup data listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet is automatically stored However this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modificatio ns to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use 1 B 11 2 2 4 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Clavinova We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference About this Owner s Manual and Data List This manual consists of the following sections Owner s Manual Introduction page 101 Please read this section first Quick Guide page 23 eee This section explains how to use the basic functions Basic Operation page 63 This section explains how to use the basic operations including display based controls Reference page 291 This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument s various functions Appendix page 208 This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and Specifications Data List Voice List MIDI Data Format etc e The CGP 1000 will be referred to as the CGP
66. UP Plays a fill in which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right ENDING1 3 Same as the ENDING rit I III buttons FADE IN OUT Switches Fade In Fade Out function on and off FINGERED FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes page 107 BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback If the fingering is set to Al FULL KEYBOARD the function does not work PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the 4 A W 8 A W buttons You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument DUAL ON OFF Same as the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 button SPLIT ON OFF Same as the PART ON OFF SPLIT LEFT button OTS Calls up the next One Touch Setting OTS Calls up the previous One Touch Setting BEC The Sostenuto and Portament functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices even they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals Adjustable Parameters for Each Function The parameters below correspond to buttons 2 A W 8 A W and their availability depends on the selected control type For example if SUSTAIN is selected as the type the parameters HALF PEDAL POINT RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and LEFT automatically appear in the display SONG STYLE MIC LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 HALF PEDA
67. When this advanced fingering type is engaged the instrument will auto matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything anywhere on the keyboard using both hands You don t have to worry about specifying the Style chords Although the Al Full Key board type is designed to work with many songs some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature This type is similar to Full Keyboard with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords based on the previously played chord etc 9th 11th and 13th chords cannot be played This type is available only for Style playback Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style Try to play the melody along with just the rhythm You can sound different rhythms for each Style Keep in mind however that not all Styles contain rhythm channels Select a Style page 45 Press the ACMP ON OFF to turn Auto Accompaniment off rhythm channels 3 Press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to play back the Press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to stop the rhythm Style Playback related Settings Turning channels of the Style on off A Style contains eight channels RHY1 Rhythm 1 PHR2 Phrase 2 You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on off as the Style plays 1 Press the CHANNEL ON OFF button to cal
68. Wood with Synthetic ivory keytops Keyboard Wood is used for the white keys Number of keys 88 Display 640 X 480 dots VGA color 7 8 inch LCD Music Score Lyrics and Text YES Wallpaper Customize YES Polyphony max 128 128 Voice Selection 590 voices 480 XG Voices 19 Drum SFX Kits GM2 GS GS Voices for GS Song playback Natural Voice 38 S Articulation Voice 38 MegaVoice 18 volge Live Voice 56 Cool Voice 39 Sweet Voice 23 Organ Flutes 10 Regular Voice 368 Voice Editing Voice Set YES Reverb Chorus DSP Master 9 Effect Blocks Compressor Microphone 1 Reverb 34 Preset 3 User Reverb Chorus DSP Chorus 30 Preset 3 User Effects DSP 1 191 Preset 3 User Effect Types DSP 2 6 191 Preset 10 User Master EQ 5 Preset 2 User Master Compressor 5 Preset 5 User Part EQ 27 Parts Vocal Harmony 60 Preset 10 User Accompaniment Styles 408 Pro Styles 334 Session Styles 38 Pianist Styles 36 MegaVoice Styles YES Accompaniment Style Fingering Single Finger Fingered Fingered On Bass Multi Finger Al Fingered Full Keyboard Al Full Keyboard Style Creator YES OTS One Touch Setting 4 for Each Style OTS Link YES Preset YES Music Finder Edit YES Preset Songs 120 Guide Follow Lights Any Key Karao Key Vocal Cue TIME Guide Lamp YES Song Performance assistant technology YES Recording
69. above by using the 2 A W 3 A V SECTION buttons Select the desired channel for the section chosen in step 4 above by using the 4A W 5 A V CHANNEL buttons Repeat steps 3 5 above to replace the patterns of other channels NO GQ A Press the J SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display and save your data from the display page 69 122 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Style Creator Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style you can play back the Style and select the method of playback Use the 6 A W 7 A W PLAY TYPE buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method e SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously e ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display Any chan nels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously e OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display Editing the Created Style You can edit the Style you ve created by using Realtime recording Step recording and or Style Assembly Basic Operation for Editing Styles 1 Select a Style to be edited 2 Select the file to which the Call up the operation display Aata sayed You can also select the specified FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU filetowhich the data isto be 3 sa
70. after playing back a Song The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a Style or a Voice after selecting a Song e The level balance of the Parts can change and unex pected sounds can be produced because of the effects applied to each Part The Off setting is not shown for the Play Type parameter in the Assembly Style Creator feature e The selected section is set to record enable Release the recording assignment by pressing the appropriate 1 W 8 W button in the recording channel display TAB lt 4 button gt BASIC tab gt F REC CH The channels BASS PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel Edit e This is normal BASS PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles cannot be edited Registration memory The Song Style registered to the Registration Mem ory cannot be called up e If the registered Song Style is contained on USB storage device and the USB storage device is not inserted or connected to the instrument the Song Style cannot be called up Insert or connect the appropriate USB storage device containing the Song Style data The order for calling up Registration Memory settings is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting display e The bank containing the Registration has not been selected Select the appropriate bank page 132 When using the Freeze function of the Registration Memory the On Off setting of the Left Part does not change
71. appears indicating data cannot be copied Protected Songs Prot 1 Prot 2 is indicated at the upper left side of the file names are included in the copied files These protected Songs cannot be copied However Songs with a Prot 2 indication can be moved cut and paste operation to a USB flash memory Data Backup 2 Music Finder Record Effect MIDI Tem plate and System Data 1 Insert connect the backup USB storage device destination 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION J UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt SYSTEM RESET 3 Press one of the F I buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data A Select the appropriate USB tab to which you want to save the data by using the TAB lt gt buttons 5 Save your data page 69 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above 1 Insert connect the backup USB storage device destination uoneisdo aiseg 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt OWNER 3 Press the D BACKUP button to save the data to the USB storage device To restore the data press the E RESTORE button in step 3 above BEM e It takes a few minutes to complete the backup restore operation e Backup data which has not been created on the CGP 1000 cannot be restored Z CAUTION Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER dis play before restoring If the songs are not moved the opera tion deletes the data
72. are held any subse quently played notes have no attack applied In the EACH mode attack is applied equally to all notes 4 2 2 3 2 These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice The 4 2 2 3 and 2 controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound volume LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay Voice Creating Voice Set Footage The term footage is a reference to the sound generation of tradi tional pipe organs in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths in feet CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 105 Sad10A Supp pue Buea BUISN Voice Creating Voice Set EFFECT EQ Same parameters as in the VOICE SET EFFECT EQ tab display explained on page 102 Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets effects etc Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the VOICE SET displays including effects and EQ Usually these settings are automatically called up when a Voice is selected However you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below For example if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect set the HARMONY ECHO parameter to OFF in the
73. button To adjust the keyboard RIGHT 1 volume press the 6 A W button BALANCE 85 100 RO About keyboard parts Right 1 Right 2 Left See page 79 Other guide functions The initial setting Follow Lights page 142 was used in the instructions One handed Practice with the Guide Lamps above There are additional functions in the Guide feature as described below To select a guide function see page 141 O For keyboard performance e Any Key This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys o For Karaoke e Karao Key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger while you sing along e Vocal CueTIME This automatically controls the timing of the accompaniment to match the melody pitch of your singing allow ing you to practice singing with the correct pitch CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Practicing the Left hand Part TRACK 2 Using the Guide Lamps 1 d Follow the same steps as in Practice the Right hand Part TRACK 1 Using the Guide Lamps on page 39 3 Press the TRACK 2 button to mute the left hand part The indicator of the TRACK 2 L button goes out You can now play that part by yourself A Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback and practice the muted part using the guide lamps D Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback 6 Turn the GUIDE button off Pra
74. button of the currently playing section automatically plays a fill in before returning to the same main section Break This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment to make your performance sound even more professional Press the BREAK button during Style playback To Finish Playing STYLE CONTROL OPOP amp ROCK BALLAD DANCE QSWING amp JAZZQ R amp B COUNTRY O LATIN O BALLROOM TENNENT WORLD PIANIST J J ACMP_ AUTO SYNC SYNC START ON OFF FILL IN INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP MUSIC FINDER O ie CO O ie ie ie ie oO Oo o 2 o 2 O I Start stop Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button is pressed Ending This is used for the ending of the Song Each preset Style features three different endings When the ending is finished the Style stops automatically Press one of the ENDING rit I II buttons during Style playback You can have the ending gradually slow down ritardando by pressing the same ENDING rit button again while the ending is playing back BI If you press the ENDING rit I button in the middle of your performance a fill in automatically plays before the ENDING rit I Fade Out
75. buttons Press the 4 V PASTE button to paste the file The file moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order Deleting Files Folders This operation lets you delete a file folder 1 2 Call up the display containing the file folder you want to delete Press the 5 W DELETE button The pop up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display DELETE Select nis and or folders to be Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desired file folder To cancel the selection press the same A J button again E Selecting all files folders Press the 6 W ALL button to select all files folders indicated on the cur rent display including the other pages To cancel the selection press the 6 W ALL OFF button again Press the 7 V OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Delete operation press the 8 W CANCEL button Follow the on display instructions EE Delete the file folder VES ALL carnea Delete all selected files folders Kl Leave the file folder as is without deleting CANCEL seniais Cancel the Delete operation Deleting all data in a USB storage device at once Formatting a USB storage device completely erases all data on the USB storage device page 68 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 71 uoneisdyo aiseg CG amp gS o oa O o o K DO Basic Displays M
76. call up the Style Creator display Use the TAB lt gt buttons then select the BASIC tab to call up the RECORD display Call up the display for selecting sections etc by pressing the EXIT button Use the 3 A V 4A V buttons to select the section page 117 to be recorded STYLE CREATOR Classic8Beat TAB Bar 1 A PATTERN LENGTH 4 ci UC j EH est 7 2 mm Cc CI CH SECTION PATTERN LENGTH 1 IAIN E 2 IAIN C IAIN I Use the 5 A W 6 A W buttons to determine the length number of measures of the selected section Actually enter the specified length for the selected section by pressing the D EXECUTE button Style Creator When recording channels BASS PHR2 based on an internal Style delete the original data before recording Overdub recording is not possible on channels BASS PHR2 see page 118 When the RECORD display chan nel indication at the lower part of the STYLE CREATOR display dis appears you can press the F REC CH button to re display it Muting specific channels dur ing recording Turn off the desired channels by pressing the 1 Y 8 W but tons Specifying sections from the panel buttons You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons INTRO MAIN END ING etc on the panel Pressing one of the Section buttons calls
77. cece eeeseseeeeseeseseneeesessesenssssesesenenssesees page 28 iano reser With just the press of a button you can reconfigure the entire instrument for optimum piano performance no matter what settings you ve made from the panel Now you can enjoy performing and practicing with authentic grand piano sounds and response instantly UOID2mDOIU Playing Other Instrument Voices ceeeeceecesseteeeeteeseesseeeeees page 32 The instrument gives you not only various realistic piano Voices but also features an exceptionally wide variety of authentic instruments both acoustic and electronic VOICE CONTROL PIANO OgPiano Ostrincs GWIS O SAXOPHONE O wadowitin O ORGAN II J TRUMPET QGBRASS O ACCORDION O K O SYNTHAFX O paUM KIT O FLUTES Perform Along with a Full Band S ng Playback 22 sessieieccsessceseeeeszepiesaseceesicsdesesuescavwieeyvonete page 35 Play along with previously recorded Song data and fill out your solo perfor mance with the sounds and arrangement of an entire band or orchestra SONG SELECT Ease in Playing Backing Parts with Songs performance assistant technology ee page 43 The new performance assistant technology features make it exceptionally easy to play professional sounding backing parts a
78. display explained below You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt E REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET gt TAB gt VOICE SET 2 Use the A B buttons to select a keyboard part 3 Use the 4A V 8 A W buttons to enable disable automatic calling up of the settings ON or OFF independently for each parameter group Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters contained in each parameter group wn oO 2 fo gt DD fe me uw me G o DD Z D o o 2 O G e o D 106 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Using Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing Mary Had a Little Lamb with the Auto CODE EAR page 45 ONE HIE page 47 Learning How to Play Indicate Chords for Style Playback page 49 Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style EE page 50 Style Characteristics The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name Pro These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined with perfect playability The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the chords of the player As a result your chord changes and colorful harmo nies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment Session These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord typ
79. displays of the Clavinova are courtesy of the Gakkigaku Shiryokan Collection for Organolgy Kunitachi College of Music e The following instruments shown in the displays of the Clavinova are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments balafon gender kalimba kanoon santur gamelan gong harp hand bell bagpipe banjo carillon mandolin oud pan flute pungi rabab shanai sitar steel drum and tambra e This product is manufactured under license of U S Patents No 5231671 No 5301259 No 5428708 and No 5567901 from IVL Audio Inc e The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co Ltd e This product utilizes NF an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co Ltd NF is used with the patented LZW licensed from Unisys Co Ltd NF may not be separated from this product nor may it be sold lent or transferred in any way Also NF A GESS may not be reverse engineered reverse compiled reverse assembled or copied This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group Trademarks e All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 5 Accessories Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration 50 greats for the Piano Music Book Owner s Manual Data List The following items may be included or optional depending on your locale Bench E Tunin
80. ee r FUNCTION o w AUX PEDAL POLARITY LEFT RIGHT RIGHT2 3 Press the TAB gt button to select the KEYBOARD PANEL tab When the setting is further divided into additional settings a list will be shown in the display KEYBOARD PANEL LEFT Ri TOUCH OFF LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 27 RS ee ee 4 Press the A button to select the 1 INITIAL TOUCH KEYBOARD PANEL LEFT RI R2 1 INITIAL TOUCH NORMAL 2 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN MASTER TOUCH OFF LEVEL LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT2 5 Press the 1 A W 2A V button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard For details on the touch sensitivity settings see page 29 Throughout this manual arrows are used in the instructions indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain displays and functions For example the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as FUNCTION gt D CONTROLLER gt TAB gt KEYBOARD PANEL A 1 INITIAL TOUCH Playing Voices The instrument features a variety of Voices including exceptionally realistic piano Voices VOICE category selection buttons page 32 METRONOME ON OFF button NEE VOICE CONTROL page 30 CHOIR PERC amp COACCORDION O Sean DRUM KIT Si cae 000 c000 000 ooo 0 PIANO RESE
81. example SONG CREATOR NewSong TUTTE cs mmer 21 mm 1 0000 Note c3 79 0000 1900 001 1 0000 Note D3 79 0000 1900 001 1 0000 Note E3 79 0000 1900 001 1 0000 Note F3 79 0000 1900 l 001 1 0000 Note G3 79 0000 1900 001 1 0000 late A3 9 0000 1900 Ten 001 1 1900 ia DELETE EI lt Bd CS Ee lt BAR BEAT CLOCK v v ee Bi rr rer Recording Your Performance Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data it may not appear exactly the same as shown below About the items which can be selected via the G H I but tons See page 151 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 149 s8u0s sunipy pue Bunea Suter L D I be Do DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO L O ob Z D D Recording Your Performance A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 Move the cursor to the begin ning of the Song Press the SONG STOP button during recording 10 11 Press the 6 A W button to enter a quarter note rest To enter the rest use the 4 A W 8 A W butto
82. in the Filter display page 90 The sound does not change when replacing Voices with the Song Auto Revoice feature e Depending on the particular Song data there are some instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect even when replacing Voices The sound of the Voice doesn t change even when editing the Voice e Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depend ing on the original settings of the Voice Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot be selected for Step recording e This is normal Style playback does not start e Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button e MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL Make sure this is set to INTERNAL page 202 Only the rhythm channel plays e Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on press the ACMP ON OFF button e You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the keyboard Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard Styles cannot be selected e If the size of the Style data is large about 120 KB or greater the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be ready by the instrument The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment e You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating the chord Refer to Chord Types Recognized in the Fin gered Mode of the separate Data List e You may be p
83. instantly jump back to the original display by double clicking on one of the A J buttons A Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback SONG O REC STOP OPPLAY PAUSE _REW FF D D po e an IIe NEW SONG SYI 5 Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback SONG REC STOP PLAY PAUSE REW FF 5 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 35 36 Playing Songs saved to USER page 43 1 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display 2 Press the TAB 4 gt button to select the USER tab 3 Press one of the Al IJ buttons to select the desired Song BIT Select the file to which the data is saved You can also select the specified file to which the data is saved by pressing the USER button USER A SONG A J Playing Songs saved to a USB storage device page 43 For information on using USB storage devices see page 22 Connect the USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display Press the TAB lt 4 gt buttons to select the USB tab USB1 USB2 corresponding to the USB storage device you inserted in Step 1 The indication USB1 USB2 will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices A Use the A IJ buttons to select a Song BIT Select the file to which th
84. lid so that the end of the stay fits into the recess in the lid 16 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual For the longer stay use the inner recess and for the shorter stay use the outer recess to support the lid Shorter stay E To close the lid 1 Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid 2 Hold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay 3 Carefully lower the lid Using Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the PHONES jacks located on the bottom left of the instrument Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be connected If you are using only one pair of headphones you can plug them into either of these jacks Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the Clavinova package so that you can hang the headphones on the Clavinova Install the headphone hanger using included two screws 4 x 10mm as shown in the fig ure Outputting sound from the speaker while headphones are con nected 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION I UTILITY gt TAB lt CONFIG 2 2 Press the 3 A W 44 W SPEAKER button to select ON Outputting sound only from the headphones From the display called up in step 2 above press the 3 A W 4A V SPEAKER button to select OFF When OFF is selected the speakers will not sound and you can only hear the Clavinova sound via the headphones Using Headphones Ab CAU
85. loca tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain Examples of wet damp locations are near a swimming pool spa tub sink or wet basement 9 This product should be used only with the components supplied or a cart rack or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer If a cart rack or stand is used please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product 10 The power supply cord plug should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and or electrical storm activity 11 Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist 12 Electrical electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when a The power supply cord has been damaged or b Objects have fallen been inserted or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings or c The product has been exposed to rain or d The product dose not operate exhibits a marked change in performance or e The product has been dropped or the enclosure of the product has been damaged 13 Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user maintenance instructions All other servic ing should be referred to qualified service personnel 14 This product eit
86. major to a minor chord this table lowers the third sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major minor chord such as Intros and Endings NATURAL MINOR Sth In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major minor chord such as Intros and Endings DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above augmented and dimin ished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern E NTT BASS ON OFF The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note when the on bass chord is recognized by the instrument E HIGH KEY This sets the highest key upper octave limit of the note transposition for the chord root change Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next
87. not turn on e Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the instrument and the male plug into a proper AC outlet A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off e Electrical current is being applied to the instrument This is normal Noise is heard from the instrument s speakers e Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument or if the phone is ringing Turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument The letters in the display cannot be read because the display is too bright or dark e Use the LCD CONTRAST knob to adjust for optimum visibility e Adjust the brightness of the display page 19 The overall volume is too low or no sound is heard e The master volume may be set too low Set it to an appropriate level with the MASTER VOLUME dial e The volume of the individual parts may be set too low Raise the volume in the BALANCE display page 40 e Make sure the desired channel is set to ON page 109 e Headphones are connected disabling the speaker out put This happens when the speaker setting is set to HEADPHONE SW page 17 Unplug the headphones e Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON page 17 e The Fade In and Fade Out function is on muting the sound To turn it off press the pedal to which you assigned the Fade In Out function e Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON page 202 Not all simultaneously pla
88. note of the chord of Style playback The bass note will be detected regardless of the ACMP ON OFF or split point set tings When several channels are simultaneously set to ON the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels MIDI USB1 Py al USB2 1293 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 14 15 16 ALL OFF MIDI USB1 USB2 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Operation Select the channel and set the ON OFF for that chan nel Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 203 SODIAV JAYIO YUM JUatUNAsU INOA SUIS ma D SS gt a Q 2 E S5 O E KS e E Si E bei S 5 Se T S gt ep E o D 204 MIDI Settings CHORD DETECT display Setting the Chord Type for Style Play back via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Opera tion on page 200 These settings let you determine the chord type for Style playback based on the note messages received via MIDI The note on off messages received at the chan nel s set to ON are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style playback The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type The chord type will be detected regardless of the ACMP ON OFF or split point settings When several channe
89. number of measures in the display You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be dis played part lyrics chords etc Use the 1 A W 4 A gl buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed 38 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired 1 Press the 8 A V SETUP button to call up the detailed setting display 2 Press the 1 A W 6 A V buttons to set the view type Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left hand right hand part This set ting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected AUTO The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right and left hand parts are assigned automatically setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the FUNCTION gt B SONG SETTING 1 16 Assigns the specified MIDI channel 1 16 to each of the left and right hand parts OFF LEFT CH only No channel assignment This disables display of the left hand key range LEFT CH RIGHT CH This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song at the stopped position This menu KEY SIGNATURE R e is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation letting you shift or correct the timing QUANTIZE of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular
90. organ Voices that you can call up with the ORGAN FLUTES button It also gives you the tools to create your own original organ sounds by using the Voice Set function Just as on a traditional organ you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the flute footages Basic Procedure Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited page 32 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 103 wn o 2 5 gt DD C ke Lu Ki C Wd oD E T o g O ob T Voice Creating Voice Set N CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings the settings will be lost If you wish to store the settings here make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off 104 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 2 In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display press the 6 A FOOT AGE button to call up the VOICE SET ORGAN FLUTES display A LJ IA JazzDraw a RockingOre UC W st la BluesOrgan Percussive ak eC SixteenOne Ia GospelOrg H eC EvenBars a PadOrgan T i PopOrgan FullRanks CJ OrganFlutes PI I L Eo i Ld Ed Ed Ed e C LJ CJJ GE H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up the relevant setting display For information on the available parameters see the following Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET ORGAN FLUTES displays
91. patterns channels from existing internal Styles 1 Select the basic Style then call up the display for Style Assembly The operation steps are the same as steps 1 4 in Realtime recording page 119 In step 4 select the ASSEMBLY tab 2 Select the desired section Intro Main Ending etc for your new Style Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons INTRO MAIN ENDING etc on the panel Change the section as desired by using the 6 A W 7 A W buttons and execute the operation by pressing the 8 A OK button STYLE CREATOR Classic8Beat BASIC Y asseveLY CHANNEL ED Y RHYTHM1 CHORD2 Gem E Classic8Beat Je Classic8Beat eps RHYTHM2 miggy PAD ES Classic8 amp 8 Beat via Classic8Beat MAIN VARIATION O O Beate Je CiassicsBeat_ gt 10 B c D ki Classics Beat EZ Classic8Beat COPY FROM SECTION SECTION CHANNEL Section display Indicates the channels that make up the section 3 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the A D and F I buttons Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again Select the Style containing the pat tern you want to replace in the Style Selection display To return to the previous screen press the EXIT button after selecting the Style Select the desired section of the newly imported Style chosen in step 3
92. performance 1 Select the desired record from the Music Finder display 2 Press the H ADD TO FAVORITE button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE display j MUSIC STYLE BEAT TEMPO 2 Nights In A Big City 40 sBigBand 4 4 SORTEY C3 F 69SummersLong__ PowerRock ala l vse A Bridge To Cross Troubled PowerBallad 4 4 SORT ORDER A Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 4 4 ASCENDING S A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad 44 A Feeling Of Love Tonight __ MovieBallad 4 4 FAVORITE A Fire Lighter Unplugged1 aia A Misty Ballad CoolJazBallad 4 4 0 TEMPO LOCK Cc f A Nickel In The Nickelodeon Dixieland2 4 4 poy A Night In A Wonderful Land 6 80rchestral 6 8 EE CH A Night Of Music BroadwayBallad Au 64 R EMNB rey LJ A Sad Song To Make Jude Be LoveSong 4 4 GET A Song For New England VintageGtrPop ER RECORDS A Spy Does It Better PianoBallad 4 4 1006 MUSIC STYLE SEARCH ES E ES 1 a Lees one 3 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB lt gt buttons and check to see if the record has been added Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display 1 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display 2 Press the H DELETE FROM FAVORITE button Editing Records You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record The newly created records are automaticall
93. pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root ROOT of the new chord RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord RETRIGGER TO The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next ROOT chord However the octave of the new note remains the same The Registration Memory function allows you to save or register virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory button and then instantly recall your cus tom panel settings by pressing a single button The registered settings for eight Reg istration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank file Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups Registering Custom Panel Setups 1 MEMORY Set up the panel controls such as Voice Style effects and so on as desired Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered with the Registration Memory function Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY button The display for selecting the items to be registered appears Only the items selected here will be registered REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS To register One Touch Setting en of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons To register Registration Memory 1 SEH the ee parameter groups from the below S one 2 the REGISTRATION MEMORY BC J 8 p GROUP SELECT Press the 2 A W 7 A W
94. result a long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main display To avoid this turn the power on after disconnecting the device The main background image from the CD ROM is not displayed e This is because the Main display is loaded prior to load ing of the image from the CD ROM To remedy this copy the image data from the CD ROM to the User dis play then set it as the main background image page 19 The damper sostenuto and soft functions do not work for the relevant pedals e Each pedal has been assigned to a different function Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUS TAIN SOSTENUTO and SOFT page 191 e Make sure the Registration Sequence function is set to OFF page 135 Files Folders Some characters of the file folder name are garbled e The language settings have been changed Set the appro priate language for the file folder name page 18 An existing file is not shown e The file extension MID etc may have been changed or deleted Manually rename the file adding the appro priate extension on a computer The data contained in the USB storage device is not shown on the instrument itself e Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be handled by the instrument Rename the file reducing the number of characters to 50 or less CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 205 xipueddy Ray D Cc bp bi S lt How can I stop the demo e Pre
95. ric ep c ric cic elei je c c ric elei c CM7aug Czaug C148 C145 Csus4 C1425 eipieipl R c c Ric G c d clr jee c c R c R C Chord notes C R Recommended notes NTR Note Transposition Rule This determines the relative position of the root note in the chord when converted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes ROOT TRANS Root Transpose When the root note is transposed the pitch relationship between notes is maintained For example the notes C3 E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3 A3 and C4 when they are trans gt When playing an F E When playing a g C major chord major chord posed to F Use this setting for chan nels that contain melody lines ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range For example gt SE the notes C3 E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3 F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts oe When playing an F major chord When playing a C major chord E NTT Note Transposition Table This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED the transposition table used does not do any note conversion When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS the table
96. risks have been eliminated DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha Product perfor mance and or safety standards may be diminished Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is has been modified Implied warranties may also be affected SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing However Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES Yamaha strives to pro duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them meet these goals In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law we want you to be aware of the following 92 469 bottom Battery Notice This product MAY contain a small non rechargable battery which if applicable is soldered in place The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years When replacement becomes necessary contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement Warning Do not attempt to recharge disassemble or incinerate this type of battery Keep all batteries away from children Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws Note In some areas the servicer is requir
97. terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument MIDI THRU Simply relays the MIDI messages received at MIDI IN For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effec tively use it refer to the following sections e Whatis MIDI ecreis page 196 e What You Can Do With MIDI page 199 WIRE EE page 200 Connecting a Computer USB Device or Internet QOOO Connecting a Computer By connecting a computer to the USB TO HOST or MIDI terminals you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI and take advan tage of sophisticated computer music programs Keep in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver The instructions below explain how to connect and use the terminals 2 NOTE If you are using a computer that has a USB interface we recom mend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB rather than by MIDI 2 NOTE Driver A driver is software that provides a data transfer interface between the computer s operating system and a connected hardware device You need to install a USB MIDI driver to connect the com puter and the instrument Refer to the separate Installation Guide page 4 This explanation is divided into two parts covering the two connections connection to the USB TO HOST
98. the change press the 1 W 8 A OK button or enter the next character CG amp o oa O o o K DO When the entered hiragana characters are shown in reverse display highlighted e Re converting the characters into other kanji Press the 1 A ENTER button e Changing the reversed area Use the DATA ENTRY dial e Changing the converted kanji back to hiragana Press the 7 W DELETE button e Clearing the reversed area at once Press the 8 W CANCEL button e Entering the hiragana itself without converting it Press the 8 A OK button e Canceling the character entering operation Press the 8 W CANCEL button Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Restoring the Factory programmed System The operation ot restoring the factory programmed settings does not affect the Internet Set While holding the C7 key right most key on the keyboard turn the POWER but tings To reset the Internet Set ton ON tings refer to page 187 This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore operation explained in step 2 of the following section 74 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Independently by Item 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB gt SYSTEM RESET 2 Select items by pressing the 1 A W 3 A V buttons SYSTEM SET
99. the Internet Settings display you can make various settings related to the Internet connection including preferences for the menus and displays The Internet Settings display has four sub displays Browser LAN Wireless LAN and Others Basic Operation Press the 5 W SETTING button to call up the Internet Setting dis play 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the desired display 3 Select the desired item by pressing the 1 A V A V button INTERNET SETTING srowser Y ran o Yyikenesstan E ams 7 Home page Yamaha Website 1 Set current page as Home Register J Restore default Home Initialize Show images On Time zone U K time GMT Encode CONTROL MENU mm ES gt a Le CJ CGJ OL 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 To call up the relevant Edit display press the 2 A W 3 A W EDIT button For some items the Edit display may not be shown but the setting or change may be executed 5 Press the 2A W A V button to select the setting or change the value This can also be done by using the DATA ENTRY dial Entering Characters When the character input dis play is opened you can enter Enc de characters Refer to Entering Ge SE Characters on page 178 Set current page as Home Register J Restore default Home Initialize J Show images On Time zone UK time GMT BROWSER
100. the Next Playback Song While a Song is playing back you can queue up the next Song for playback This is convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selection display while a Song is playing back The NEXT indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name To cancel this setting press the 8 W Cancel button E Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the Song Playback When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time channels 9 16 in the Song data are replaced with style channels allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the Sing a long folder Select a Song page 35 Select a Style page 45 3 Press the STYLE CONTROL ACMP ON OFF button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment function A Press the STYLE CONTROL SYNC START button to enable standby letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing 5 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback 6 Play chords along with the Song The chord name is indicated in the Main display To return to the Main dis play press the DIRECT ACCESS button then press the EXIT button When the Song playback is stopped t
101. the Voice Selection display for each part page 32 Style name and related information Displays the currently selected Style name time signature and tempo Pressing the D button calls up the Style Selection display page 45 Current chord name If the ACMP ON OFF button is set to On the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard will be displayed Song name and related information Displays the currently selected Song name time signature and tempo If the Song contains the chord data the current chord name will be displayed in the CHORD segment see above Pressing the I button calls up the Song Selection display page 35 Registration Memory Bank name Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name Pressing the J button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display page 132 When the Freeze function is ON an F indication appears page 133 Volume Balance Displays the volume balance among the parts Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the 1 A W 8 A W buttons Transpose Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units page 56 Tempo Displays the current tempo of the Song or Style BAR current position of the Song or Style Displays the current position of the Song or bar and beat number from playback start of the Style O Recording status of USB Audio recorder While recording a REC indication appears Reg
102. the following Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console EFFECT EQ CMP Edited or saved data of the Vocal Harmony type 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1 2 and 3 above Backup procedure 1 Song Style Registration Memory Bank and Voice Data 1 Insert connect the backup USB storage device destination 2 Call up the display containing the desired file to be copied Song Press the SONG SELECT button Style Press the STYLE category selection buttons Registration Memory Bank Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEM ORY REGIST BANK buttons Voice Press one of the VOICE category selection but tons 3 Select the USER tab by using the TAB lt 4 gt buttons 4 Press the 3 V COPY button to copy the file folder The pop up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display SO eet folders to he 5 Press the 6 W ALL button to select all files folders indicated on the current dis play and all other pages To cancel the selection press the 6 W ALL OFF button again 6 Press the 7 W OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Copy operation press the 8 W CANCEL button 7 Select the destination USB tab to which the file folder is to be copied by using the TAB lt gt buttons 8 Press the 4 V PASTE button to paste the file folder If a message
103. the keys and still have the Style play In other words if you release the keys sooner than the time set here the Synchro Stop function works Style Touch Turns touch response for the Style playback on off When this is set to ON the Style vol ume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard Style Change Behavior There are three types as shown below Section Set Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting differ ent Styles when Style playback is stopped When set to OFF and Style playback is stopped the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected When any of the MAIN A D sections is not included in the Style data the nearest section is automatically selected For example when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style MAIN C will be called up Split Point Settings Tempo This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles dur ing Style playback HOLD The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained RESET cicera The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style Part On Off This determines whether the Style Channel On Off status changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback HOLD The Style Channel On Off status of the previous Style is maintained RESET ng All Style Channels are set to On Split Point Settings These are th
104. the rooi key and a white key to its left H For a minor chord MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering types FINGERED Lets you finger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard while the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm bass and chord accompaniment in the selected Style The Fingered type rec ognizes the various chord types which are listed on the separate Data List booklet and can be looked up using the Chord Tutor function page 49 FINGERED ON BASS Accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered but the lowest note played in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note allowing you to play on bass chords in the Fingered mode the root of the chord is always used as the bass note FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered even if you split the notes between your left and right hands for example playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right Al FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords based on the previously played chord etc Al FULL KEYBOARD
105. to Fade In Out at the beginning of the phrase you want to fade out For information on the settings see page 191 Set the Fade In Out time The times of the fade in and fade out can be set independently For details refer to page 109 Operations for Song Playback Depending on the particular Song data the Style will also play back at the same time CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 137 s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter L 00 be Do DD ta me fe me f S DD Le oO L O ob Z D D Operations for Song Playback Phrase Mark Phrase Mark is a pre pro grammed marker in certain Song data which specifies a certain location set of measures in the Song The preset Songs in the Follow Lights folder contain the Guide settings These Songs are inap propriate for use with ALL or RANDOM repeat 138 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual E Top Pause Rewind Fast Forward Moving to the top position of the Song Press the SONG STOP button regardless of whether the Song is stopped or play ing back Pausing the Song Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button during Song playback Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button again and the Song will resume from the current position Moving back and forth rewind and fast forward 1 Press the SONG REW or SONG FF button to move back and forth rewind and fast forward It calls up a pop up window showing the current measure number in the Main display For Songs c
106. to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off CGP 1000 Owner s Manual OO wn o 2 e gt DD me uw me G o DD Z D o o 2 O G e o D Voice Creating Voice Set The available parameters differ depending on the Voice Changes to velocity curve according to Touch sensitivity TOUCH SENSE DEPTH Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth with Off set set to 64 Actual Velocity for tone generator Depth 127 twice Depth 64 normal ilkenin gn Ee Depth 32 DU EE ff _ half Received Velocity Actual KeyOn speed TOUCH SENSE OFFSET Changes to velocity curve according to VelOffset with Depth set to 64 Actual Velocity for tone generator Offset 96 64 Offset 127 127 Offset 64 normal 127 64 SD BW Received Velocity Actual KeyOn speed x Oieet 127 Portamento Time The Portamento Time deter mines the pitch transition time Portamento is a function that cre ates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next 100 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 99 The Voice Set parameters are organized into five different displays The parameters in each di
107. to the instrument CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Connecting the power cable First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall fers i Ley DI Ta The shape of the plug and outlet T differ depending on locale Opening the key cover Using the hand grip on the front lift open the key cover If you want to play in this condition with the panel unopened go on to step 4 Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening the cover Opening the panel Fold down the hand grip at the top as shown then grip the key cover at the bottom and lift it gently pushing it inside the CGP 1000 revealing the con trol panel Ab CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening the cover Turning the power on Press the POWER switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up 5 Playing the keyboard Play the keyboard to produce sound d Adjusting the volume While playing the keyboard adjust the volume level by using the MASTER VOLUME located at the left of the panel O FADE IN OUT MIN MAX Ji MASTER VOLUME uoonponu 6
108. transposition for the keyboard pitch KBD song playback SONG or overall sound of the instrument MASTER respectively 1 Call up the operation display MIXING CONSOLE gt TAB lt 4 gt TUNE 2 Use the 1A W 3 A V buttons to set the transposition Fine tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument useful when you play the instrument along with other instruments or CD music 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION A MASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE TAB lt 4 MASTER TUNE 2 Use the 4A W 5 A V buttons to set the tuning Press the 4 or 5 s A and W buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory resetting of 440 0 Hz Scale Tuning You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt A MASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE gt TAB gt SCALE TUNE 2 Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using the 6 A W 7 A V buttons Checkmark the box by pressing the 8 A button 3 Use the A B buttons to select the desired scale The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display 84 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual A Change the following settings as necessary e Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard TUNE 1 Press the 3 A V button to selec
109. up the SECTION display Change the sections by using the 6 A W 7 A W buttons and execute the selection by pressing the 8 A button The INTRO 4 ENDING 4 sec tions cannot be specified with the panel controls CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 119 s J 5 yu wruedwoy ony y Sun pue Bunea Suen N Q gt E A o E o jon E e O O lt e 5 ka o E S D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob E Ed Style Creator Limits on the recordable Voices e RHY1 channel Any except Organ Flute Voice S Articulation Voice e RHY2 channel Only drum SFX kits e BASS PHR2 channels Any except Organ Flute Voice Drum SFX kits and S Articula tion Voice Deleting the recorded rhythm channel RHY 1 2 To delete a specific instrument sound simultaneously hold down the E RHY CLEAR but ton from the display where the recorded channels are shown and press the appropriate key N CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation page 69 120 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 10 11 12 13 14 Des Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the F REC CH button and pressing the appropriate numbered but ton 1 V 8 V To cancel the selection press the appropriate numbered button 1 Y 8 W again STYLE CREATOR Classi
110. used only converts the root note MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2 CHORD Suitable for chord transposition Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels especially when they contain piano or guitar like chordal parts MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third interval is raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major minor chords such as Intros and Endings MELODIC MINOR Sth In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern HARMONIC When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this MINOR table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major minor chords such as Intros and Endings HARMONIC In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above augmented and MINOR Sth diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a
111. various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style CHORD This is the rhythmic chord backing commonly used with piano or guitar Voices PAD risar This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings organ choir etc PHRASE sesssssss This part is used for punchy brass stabs arpeggiated chords and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting Step Recording This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter Basic Operations for Step Recording 1 Press the SONG REC and SONG STOP buttons simultaneously A blank Song New Song is called up for recording O REC STOP O PLAY PAUSE NE SYNC START 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION F DIGITAL REC MENU CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 147 Recording Your Performance 3 Press the A button to call up the Song Creator display for recording editing a Song DIGITAL REC MENU n SONG CREATOR ogge D A Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB lt gt buttons For recording melodies Select the 1 16 tab For recording cho Select the CHORD tab SONG CREATOR NewSong TAB TET Loes 3764 4i4 1920PPQ R El 001 1 U Ena CH 5 c E FILTER ye l z CO E E SELECT Je BAR BEAT CLOCK DATA ENTRY C LW Way
112. you ve made to the record as described below e Creating a new record Press the J NEW RECORD button The record is added to the ALL display If you ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display e Overwriting an existing record Press the 8 A OK button If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above the record is added to the FAVORITE display When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display the record is overwritten Saving the Record The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and addi tionally created records as a single file Keep in mind that individual records panel setups cannot be handled as separate files 1 Call up the Save display MUSIC FINDER TAB lt 4 b gt ALL 7 A W FILES 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the location for saving USER USB 3 Press the 6 V button to save the file page 69 All records are saved together as a single file Keep in mind that the Beat set ting made here is only for the Music Finder search function this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself The maximum number of records is 2500 including inter nal records CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 115 s J 5 JuauUedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Bunga Suen Convenient Music Finder feature Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER USB To call up the Mus
113. 0 Showing the Instrument s Display Contents on an External Monitor VIDEO OUT Terminal RGB OUT Terminal 190 Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller O AUX PEDAL jack cceeeseesseseereeeeees 191 Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal 191 Connecting External MIDI Devices MIDI Terminals cccccceseeseeseeeeees 194 Connecting a Computer USB Device or Internet QOOO D 194 Connecting a Computer MIDI and USB TO HOST Terminals 194 Connecting to a USB type LAN Adaptor and USB Storage Device O via the USB TO DEVICE Terminal 195 Connect to the Internet LAN Port 196 What is MIDI ee 196 What You Can Do With MIDI 199 8 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual MIDI Settings 5 0cccccccccccccccccceccccessssssssssys 200 Basie ee 200 Pre Programmed MIDI Templates scssesesseeee 201 MIDI System Settings MIDI Transmit Settings MIDI Receive Settings Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI UE 203 Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI UE 204 Appendix Troubleshooting ENER 205 Removing the CGP 1000 from its Case and Assembling the Unit ee 210 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive Optional 213 Specifications e cee eeeeeesssssseceeeceeesseeooes 214 AEK sos senkeceseceeeenensenscceedsaedadadecessdedesddsausdecetess 216 Panel Button Chart 0 eccesseeeseeeeeeeee 219 Introduction
114. 0 Owner s Manual 47 aE ee DS P During Style Playback STYLE CONTROL OPOP amp ROCK BALLAD DANCE QSWING amp JAZZQ R amp B O COUNTRY O LATIN O BALLROOM ANANT O woRLD CO PIANIST II ACMP_ AUTO SYNC SYNC START ON OFF FILL IN INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP MUSIC FINDER O Oo O O O ie Di a O ie O O O O O I E 1 f m KR KS J WS KS t Main This is used for playing the main part of the Song It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures and repeats indefinitely Each preset Style features four different patterns Press one of the MAIN A D buttons during Style playback Fill In The fill in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment to make your per formance sound even more professional Turn on the AUTO FILL IN button before starting Style playback or during playback Then simply press one of the MAIN VARIATION A B C D buttons as you play and the selected fill in section plays automatically AUTO FILL spic ing up the auto accompaniment When the fill in is finished it leads smoothly into the selected main section A B C D Even when AUTO FILL IN button is turned off pressing the same
115. 2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual EG The EG Envelope Generator settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds or the long release of a sustained piano tone ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played The lower the value the quicker the attack DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level a slightly lower level than maximum The lower the value the quicker the decay RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released The lower the value the quicker the decay Level Sustain level ATTACK 4 DECAY RELEASE Time t t e 0 Key on Key off VIBRATO DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset Pitch Time EFFECT EQ 1 REVERB DEPTH CHORUS DEPTH DSP DEPTH REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb page 93 depth CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus page 93 depth DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP page 93 depth If you want to re select the DSP type you
116. 70 Talk Setting lt cseesesntisdiccesassteccdesstesecsesccedenstezes 174 Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet cccccccssrrreeeeee 176 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet 176 Accessing the Special Website Een 177 Operations in the Special Website 177 Scrolling the Display rsrsrsrs irenste 177 Following Links ies cecsciss seedeeescet niii 178 Entering Characters ENEE 178 Return to the Previous Web Page n 178 Refreshing a Web Page Canceling Loading of a Web Page sccicdscescvasenccssientarvsoctacesentednostaracodsowenecs 179 Purchasing and Downloading Data eesseeeeeee 180 Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages 180 About the Internet Settings Display 0 183 Changing the Home Page eeesseceeeeseeeeeeeee 186 Initializing Internet Settings eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 187 Glossary of Internet Terms cessereeeee 188 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ssssssssssssssncesssneascnssssssacssvnssaces 189 Using Headphones PHONES jacks 189 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar CED MIC LINE IN jack ici cicessssceiscaspsspasnsniains 189 Connecting Audio amp Video Devices QOOG 189 Using External Audio Devices for playback and Recording AUX OUT Jacks AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED Jacks cccccssesesesssececsesesesecseeeeeees 189 Playing External Audio Devices with the Built in Speakers AUX IN Jackie 19
117. ACK 1 Using the Guide Lamps 1 select a Song page 35 2 Turn the GUIDE button on SONG CONTROL SONG SELECT O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE REW TRACK2 TRACK LYRICS i FF ORAK OUP OR score YEP OGUIDE O REPEAT w G E CI e a oo ea NEW SONG SYNC svat A 3 2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 39 40 3 Press the TRACK 1 R button to mute the right hand part The indicator of the TRACK 1 R button goes out You can now play that part by yourself BIT Have the guide lamp flash a lead in to the music In the GUIDE LAMP TIMING select NEXT page 142 A Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback Practice the muted part using the guide lamps BOG Adjusting the tempo Refer to page 31 Quickly changing tempo during a performance Tap function The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the TAP TEMPO button twice at the desired tempo 5 Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback 6 Turn the GUIDE button off Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard l Call up the Main display DIRECT ACCESS EXIT BETIA The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display When the Balance display is not indicated press the EXIT button 2 To adjust the Song volume press the 1 A W
118. Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 148 1 4 7 2 3 5 6 8 9 The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers 1 Make sure the STYLE CONTROL AUTO FILL IN button is set to OFF then press the STYLE CONTROL MAIN VARIATION A button MAIN VARIATION o o O oO 3 C B c KE 4 emm E E LO ge mmm 2 Press the 5 A W button to select the half note length L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO L O ob Z D D 3 Play the chords C F and G in the chord section of the keyboard 4 Press the STYLE CONTROL BREAK button or j 4 4 Ss WW OL tL ALT EI H gt E WL eL i OU 156 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual nn Press the 6 A W button to select the quarter note length On Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard Press the STYLE CONTROL MAIN VARIATION B button MAIN VARIATION ol ie de 002 4 1536 End BAR BEAT CLOCK 9 n gt lt gt gt
119. C LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT2 To close the website display and return to the operation display of the instrument press the EXIT button Operations in the Special Website Scrolling the Display When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser display of the instrument a scroll bar appears at the right side of the display Use the DATA ENTRY dial to scroll through the display and view those parts of the page that are not shown BE NTERNETDIRECT CONNECTION Keyboard Tips amp Tricks lt Try Auto Accompaniment Use the Data Entry dial hnd Enter button to select an item from the list 2 The Right Tempo Everytime Scroll bar 3 Go Wireless s Shortcut To MAIN Screen 5 Performance Assistant fered ON cen Tanne DATA ENTRY Accessing the Special Website CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 177 yOUsJa U BY 0 A2 Laoue au SUUD Operations in the Special Website Following Links When there is a link in the page it is shown as a button or in colored text etc To select the link press the 6 W 7 A W 8 W buttons or use the DATA ENTRY dial Press the 8 A ENTER button to actually call up the link destination TAB LA INTERNET DIRECT CONNECTION Welcome to Internet Direct Connection aC r one sera CT des
120. C MODE When re recording a specific section of an already recorded Song use the Punch IN OUT function In this method only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In Out points are not recorded over although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In Out timing You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers beforehand for automatic operation or manually execute the Punch In Out record ing by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the Basic Edit ing Operation on page 158 Use the 1 A W 6 A V buttons to determine the settings for re recording see below 2 While holding the SONG REC button press the desired track but ton en en ey 3 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback Play the key board at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point A Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 E PUNCH IN settings NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG PLAY PAUSE button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally then starts overwrite recording as s
121. E button 144 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Start recording There are several different ways you can start recording e Starting by playing the keyboard If you ve selected the SONG TRACK 1 R TRACK 2 L buttons in step 3 above play in the right hand section of the keyboard page 79 If you ve selected the SONG EXTRA TRACKS STYLES button in step 3 above play in the left hand chord section of the keyboard page 111 Record ing begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard e Starting by pressing the SONG PLAY PAUSE button If you start recording in this way empty data is recorded until you play a note on the keyboard This is useful for starting a Song with a short one or two beat pick up or lead in e Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button In this case the rhythm parts channels of the Style begin playing back and recording starts simultaneously Press the SONG STOP button to stop recording O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE Ce J IL oa Iesse NE SYNC START When recording is finished a message prompting you to save the recorded performance data appears To close the message press the EXIT button See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording Listen to your newly recorded performance Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to play back the performance you just recorded O REC Le WI D PAI NEW SONG Press the SONG SELECT button to c
122. E The guide lamps light in time with the music at the same timing you should play NES agkzgiedieketgei The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music indicating the notes you should play next The guide lamps flash if you fail to play the keys with the correct timing If the guide lamps do not light as intended The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and 2 and the chord data in the Song when such data is included If the guide lamps do not light as intended you may need to assign the appropriate right and left hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively by using the 1 A W 2 A V buttons in the SONG SETTING display as described in step 1 on the previous page L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO 2 V G Z D D 142 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Turning playback channels of the Song on and off A Song consists of 16 separate channels You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on or off Usually CH 1 is assigned to TRACK 1 button CH 2 is assigned to TRACK 2 button and CH 3 16 are assigned to the EXTRA TRACKS button 1 Press the CHANNEL ON OFF button to call up the Song CHANNEL ON OFF display If the display shown below does not appear press the CHANNEL ON OFF button again CHANNEL ON OFF 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 D 12 13 14 15 16 2 Use the 1A W 8 A V buttons to turn each channel on or off If you wan
123. EER SBBEE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 Select the appropriate tab USER USB to which you want to save the data by using the TAB Tall buttons 3 Press the 6 W SAVE button to call up the file naming display KR Enter the file name page 73 nn Press the 8 A OK button to save the file If you want to cancel the Save operation press the 8 W CANCEL button The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order Internal memory User tab displays capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 3 2MB This capacity applies to all file types including Voice Style Song and Registration data files CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 69 uoneisdo aiseg Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Restrictions for protected Songs Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental erasure They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the file names The indications and relevant restrictions are detailed below Prot 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display Disk Orchestra Collection DOC Songs and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs These cannot be copied moved saved to USB storage device Prot 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha protection formatted Songs These cannot be copied These can be moved saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage
124. EPTH DAMPER EFFECT SPATIAL EFFECT S atl alle 2 PC A alles 3 Pat 1 2 5 6 F 8 3 4 3 Press the 3 A W 4A W buttons to adjust the DYNAMIC DAMPER EFFECT depth e DYNAMIC DAMPER Effect This simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano The microphone is not used but the sound pro duced within the instrument is processed to create a spacious sensation 82 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound iAFC A Press the 5 A W 6 A V buttons to adjust the SPATIAL EFFECT depth e SPATIAL EFFECT Spatial Effect creates a sense of reverberation and spaciousness by picking up the output sound using internal microphones and output the sound from the soundboard The spread and spaciousness of the sound is differ ent depending on the depth The default setting for the depth is 30 For lower depth settings This uses the built in soundboard to create reso Higher depth settings may cause nance and enhance the acoustic realism of the sound to give it the charac audio feedback If this happens teristics of actual acoustic instruments lower the depth to eliminate the feedback For deeper depth settings The sound of the instrument itself and the sound of singing and other instruments played nearby is picked up by internal microphones and processed to simulate the spatial characteristics
125. Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound iAFC Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound iAFC When iAFC is engaged the instrument will sound deeper and more resonant similar iAFC cannot be used in the to an acoustic musical instrument This lets you experience the ambience and rever following case beration that are characteristic of performing on stage or simulates the sustain sound e When the lid is closed 8 Ee Ge TT that occur when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano e When the Speaker setting is This section describes how to make various settings for the iAFC function Headphones SW page 17 and headphones are con nected e When the Speaker setting is a Adjusting the iAFC Depth The depth of the acoustic piano resonance simulation and stage ambience simula iAFC uses Yamaha s EMR Elec tion can be set tronic Microphone Rotator tech nology to ensure stability against acoustic feedback Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt H iAFC SETTING 2 Press the D button to turn the iAFC on wn o 2 fo gt DD fe me uw me G o DD Z D o o 2 O G e o D CI Li The iAFC effect sounds from the Soundboard of the instrument The iAFC effect is not applied to the sound of the B CO headphones or the output from the AUX OUT The iAFC effect G is not turned on when the lid is closed or open with the short lid prop pd CI 2 arc EA Sak D
126. Eyes from ROBERTA Words by Otto Harbach Music by Jerome Kern 1933 UNIVERSAL POLYGRAM INTERNATIONAL PUBLISHING INC Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved International Rights Secured Not for broadcast transmission DO NOT DUPLICATE NOT FOR RENTAL WARNING It is a violation of Federal Copyright Law to synchronize this Multimedia Disc with video tape or film or to print the Composi tion s embodied on this Multimedia Disc in the form of standard music notation without the express written permission of the copy right owner Somewhere My Love Lara s Theme from DOCTOR ZHIVAGO Lyric by Paul Francis Webster Music by Maurice Jarre Copyright 1965 1966 Renewed 1993 1994 Webster Music Co and EMI Robbins Catalog Inc International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Spanish Eyes Words by Charles Singleton and Eddie Snyder Music by Bert Kaempfert 1965 1966 Renewed 1993 1994 EDITION DOMA BERT KAEMPFERT All Rights for the world excluding Germany Austria and Switzerland Controlled and Administered by SCREEN GEMS EMI MUSIC INC All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per mission Speak Softly Love Love Theme from the Paramount Picture THE GODFATHER Words by Larry Kusik Music by Nino Rota Copyright 1972 Renewed 2000 by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Stella By Starlight from the Paramount Picture THE UNINVITED Words
127. For information on the settings see page 191 RO For details on setting the fade in and fade out time see page 109 STYLE CONTROL O POP amp ROCK O BALLAD DANCE QSWING amp JAZZQ R amp B COUNTRY O LATIN O BALLROOM O TAINMENT O WORLD O PIANIST ACMP_ AUTO SYNC SYNC START ON OFF FILL IN INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP MUSIC FINDER O e O ie e O O e O ie HOG Be J5 8 OWE Be Synchro Stop When Synchro Stop is on you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys in the chord section of the keyboard This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance Press the SYNC STOP button before starting the Style playback BEd Enable Synchro Stop by pressing releasing keys Synchro Stop Window See page 110 e Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main Section Set For example you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style page 110 48 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual About the section button INTRO MAIN ENDING etc lamps e Green The section is not selected e Red The section is currently selected e Off The section contains no data and cannot be played Learning How to Play Indicate Cho
128. Headphones O PHONES jacks Connect a pair of headphones to one of the PHONES jacks standard 1 4 phone jacks located on the leftward underside of the instrument For details see page 17 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar MIC LINE IN jack By connecting a microphone to the MIC LINE IN jack standard 1 4 phone jack located on the left underside of the instrument you can enjoy singing along with Song playback KARAOKE or with your own perfor mance The instrument outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built in speakers For instructions on connecting see page 54 Please note that when con necting devices of high output level make sure to set the MIC LINE switch to LINE The front side of the instrument the keyboard side P 194 P 194 P 195 The left side of the instru ment 2 2 S AIR P 190 P 190 P 189 P 196 Connecting Audio amp Video Devices OOO 2 NOTE Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no zero resistance Using External Audio Devices for play back and Recording AUX OUT Jacks AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED Jacks You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the instrument s sound or to a cassette tape recorder or a digital audio device for recording your performance The microphone or guitar sound con nected to the instrument s MIC LINE IN jack is output at the same time Refer to the diagrams below and us
129. ION on and off VIBE ROTOR ON OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE effect type is selected HARMONY ECHO Switches the HARMONY ECHO Voice Effect on and off VOCAL HARMONY Switches the Vocal Harmony function on and off TALK Switches the MIC SETTING Talk function on and off SCORE PAGE While the song is stopped you can turn to the next score page SCORE PAGE While the song is stopped you can turn to the previous score page LYRICS PAGE While the song is stopped you can turn to the next lyrics page LYRICS PAGE While the song is stopped you can return to the last lyrics page TEXT PAGE You can turn to the next text page TEXT PAGE You can return to the last text page SONG PLAY PAUSE Same as the SONG PLAY PAUSE button STYLE START STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button TAP TEMPO Same as the TAP TEMPO button SYNCHRO START Same as the SYNC START button SYNCHRO STOP Same as the SYNC STOP button 192 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller AUX PEDAL jack INTRO1 3 Same as the INTRO I III buttons MAIN A D Same as the MAIN VARIATION A D buttons FILL DOWN Plays a fill in which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left FILL SELF Plays a fill in FILL BREAK Plays a break FILL
130. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Moon River from the Paramount Picture BREAKFAST AT TIFFANY S Words by Johnny Mercer Music by Henry Mancini Copyright 1961 Renewed 1989 by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Moonlight Serenade Words by Mitchell Parish Music by Glen Miller Copyright 1939 Renewed 1967 by ROBBINS MUSIC CORPORA TION All Rights Controlled and Administered by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved My Favorite Things from THE SOUND OF MUSIC Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Music by Richard Rodgers Copyright 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright Renewed WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through out the world International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved My Way By Paul Anka Jacques Revaux Claude Francois and Giles Thibault 1997 by Chrysalis Standards Inc Used by Permission All Rights Reserved The Nearness Of You from the Paramount Picture ROMANCE IN THE DARK Words by Ned Washington Music by Hoagy Carmichael Copyright 1937 1940 Renewed 1964 1967 by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Theme From New York New York Music by John Kander Words by Fred Ebb 1977 UNITED ARTISTS CORPORATION All Rights Controlled by EMI UNART CATALOG INC Publishing and WARNER BROS PUBLICATIO
131. Italy OrganBallad 4 4 Data A Feeling Of Love Tonight MovieBallad aia Eel A A Fire Lighter Unplugged A You can restore the instru ments A Misty Ballad CooljazzBallad 4 4 Music Finder to its original fac A Nickel In The Nickelodeon _ Dixieland2 ana A Night In A Wonderful Land 6 8Orchestral og tory resettings page 74 A Night Of Music BroadwayBallad 4 4 A Sad Song To Make Jude Be LoveSong 4 4 A Song For New England VintageGtrPop 4 4 RECORDS A Spy Does It Better PianoBallad 4 4 100 RECORD EDIT AY GR COR JAT Q MusicFinder 01_ N Q gt E A o E o jon E e O O lt e 5 ka o E S D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob c lt 7 SYSTEM NAME copy E DELETE FOLDER 116 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Style Creator Viewing information about Music Finder records The available contents of the ser Information on the record about which you like in Music Finder is called e at left are subject to change and the song of the model is downloaded or it is possible to add it to musical instruments by downloading the Music Finder record which you like For more details about this service refer to the following website http music yamaha com idc 1 Make sure that you re
132. K Russell Copyright 1941 by Peer International Corporation Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved California Girls Words and Music by Brian Wilson and Mike Love Copyright 1965 IRVING MUSIC INC Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Can You Feel The Love Tonight from Walt Disney Pictures THE LION KING Music by Elton John Lyrics by Tim Rice 1994 Wonderland Music Company Inc All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Cant Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss Hugo Peretti and Luigi Cre atore Copyright 1961 by Gladys Music Inc Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Gladys Music All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company Inc and Chrysalis Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved 220 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Chim Chim Cher ee from Walt Disney s MARY POPPINS Words and Music by Richard M Sherman and Robert B Sherman 1963 Wonderland Music Company Inc Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Do Re Mi from THE SOUND OF MUSIC Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Music by Richard Rodgers Copyright 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright Renewed WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through out the world International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Don t Be Cruel To A Heart That s
133. K O BALLAD DANCE QSWING amp JAZZQ R amp B O COUNTRY O LATIN QBALLROOM O ll O WORLD PIANIST P 5 T 2 gl 2 O vu o S o File Selection Display Configuration e Location drive of data Preset User USB Location where pre programmed Location where recorded or Location where data on USB storage device preset data is stored edited data is saved USB flash memory floppy disk etc is saved VOICE RIGHT Piano ICH E Piano Io Strings C Guitar amp Bass IC saxophone VOICE n as Hereafter in this manual any USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk etc will be referred to as USB storage device e Data files and folders The data both pre programmed and your own original are saved as files You can drop files into a folder Folder VOICE RIGHT1 Folder Icon 4 Natural IS HonkyTonk Natural 5 Natural GrandPiano2 Oct Pianol Natural P Natural EZ BrightPiano ma Oct Piano2 Natural Natural E MellowPiano ISS Harpsichrd8 Natural Natural RockPiano Sl Hes 4 66 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display File Selection Display Basic Operation 1 Select the file to which the data is saved You can also select the specified VOICE RIGHT1 tural Co i Germ i HonkyTonk file to which the data is to be hg
134. L POINT These specify the part s that will be affected by the pedal You can specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper or soft effect page 192 starts working DEPTH Determines the depth of the pedal effect UP DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected this determines whether the pitch change is raised or lowered RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected this determines the range of the pitch change in semitones Linked to the Mixing Console Pitch Bend Range page 90 set ting ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected this determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected this determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal all available drum kits are shown here letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal all sounds of the selected drum kit in KIT above are shown here This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 193 SODIAV JAYIO YUM JUatUNAsU INOA SUIS ma D SS gt a Q 2 E S O E z e E Si E bei z 5 Se T S gt ep E a D Connecting external MIDI devices MIDI terminals Connecting a Computer or USB Device Connecting External MIDI Devices MIDI Terminals Use the built in MIDI
135. NGE CH rc 3 BAR COPY B G ep poe cI 5 REMOVE EVENT y CH A SE E 5 TI C7 2 Use the 1 A V 2 A W CHANNEL buttons to select the channel to be edited The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display 3 Use the 4A W 8 A W buttons to edit the data For details on editable parameters see below A Press the D EXECUTE button to actually enter the edits for each display After the operation is completed you can execute the edition and this but ton changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the results of the edit The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone 5 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt e 5 ka o E D ES CO De CO c S D Ka oO L O ob E Ed Ah CAUTION save your data The edited Style will be lost if Save the data in the Style Selection display page 69 you change to another Style or you turn the power off QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator page 161 with the exception of the two without executing the save additional available parameters below operation 2 Eighth notes with swing 4 Sixteenth notes with swing VELOCITY Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the spe
136. NS U S INC Print All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Ob La Di Ob La Da Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright 1968 Sony ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony ATV Music Publishing 8 Music Square West Nashville TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Proud Mary Words and Music by J C Fogerty 1968 Renewed JONDORA MUSIC All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Return To Sender Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Winfield Scott Copyright 1962 by Elvis Presley Music Inc Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co and Chrysalis Songs International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved The Shoop Shoop Song It s In His Kiss Words and Music by Rudy Clark Copyright 1963 1964 by Trio Music Company Inc and Top Of The Charts Copyright Renewed All Rights for the United States Controlled and Administered by Trio Music Company Inc All Rights for the World excluding the United States Controlled and Administered by Trio Music Company Inc and Alley Music Corp International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Used by Permission CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 2241 Sittin On The Dock Of The Bay Words and Music by Steve Cropper and Otis Redding Copyright 1968 1975 IRVING MUSIC INC Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Smoke Gets In Your
137. ONTRAST knob cee eecccecceeecceeseeesseeeteeeeeeeeeees P 18 A I DUON Sigis narii aa P 25 DIRECT ACCESS button sicssccsscscsscssossosssssenessostoseossscsees P 64 MIXING CONSOLE button CHANNEL ON OFF button sesers P 109 143 1 A WI 8 A Y button P 25 TAB lt gt buttons ccc ccccccccscceesssceeesssesessseeeeeeaes P 26 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Jett tte eiis e Eessen tel tawededeties P 26 DATA ENTRY dial icsse P 67 ENTERI Dut accesiores P 67 OSB DURON cenana EENE P 67 r USER DUHOM keerringen EON P 67 PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 button SPIT LERDI pe Ser P 79 FUNCTION Button ccccesscccencsesssesteconesaceresacsanescavrceseonees P 27 O INTERNET UttO Ms eg cssseccncadercss easaaseteavaansssessnniverene P 176 SONG CONTROL SONG SELECT button P 35 Me Mr e WE P 42 O STOR TEE P 35 G a OT vic catis sence i acemavedeebussasaueaaavelesess P35 REW FF buptons cece ccecccecsseeecesseeeessseeeesseesenses P 138 e TRACKS Beit tiscisievccccezecacthecsassecseassdadivss vnevecss P 144 TRACK 2 L DUON croinra asirni P 41 TRACK 1 RU button P 39 SCORED DUON sececssscsscevescsasescssessacsuesinesseetesseenses ssencsvtestes P 38 PNRICS TEXT button eet ssiri iesiti ienas KAS GUIDE ur TE P 39 REPEAT butte ninini sd vid ES P 41 PIANO Setting PIANO RESET DUOT sirenerne ait P 29 REGISTRATION MEMORY REGIST
138. Owner s Manual 2 Use the 1 A W 2A W CHANNEL buttons to select the channel to be edited The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display 3 Use the 3 A W 8 A W buttons to edit the data For details on editable parameters see below 4 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data Save the data in the Style Selection display page 69 E SOURCE ROOT CHORD These settings determine the original key of the source pattern i e the key used when recording the pattern The default setting of CM7 with a Source Root of C and a Source Type of M7 is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new Style regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data When you change Source Root Chord from the default CM7 to another chord the chord notes and recommended notes will also change depending on the newly selected chord type When the Source Root is C CM CM6 CM7 cM 7 11 CM adda cM7 C69 c rj ce cir c ric cje R c ri c c R c c ric c R c Ieieel c R c c c eine clcic c c R Caug Cm Cme Cm7 Cm7 5 Cm Cm7 9 ciric clr ric cir Ricic c Ric d R clic ric clic ric Cm7 11 CmM7 CmM7 9 Cdim Cdimz C7 C7sus4 clr cle cir Ric c jee ric lc je R cir R ein el ce c e cic C7b5 c7 9 C7 1 7013 C79 C7 13 C7 9 c Ric clcic c c
139. Performance 162 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual E Mixing merging the data of the specified two channels MIX menu This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a different channel It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another SOURCE 1 Selects the channel 1 16 to be mixed All MIDI events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel SOURCE 2 Selects the channel 1 16 to be mixed Only note events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel In addi tion to the values 1 16 there is a COPY setting that allows you to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel If COPY is selected here the data from Source 1 is copied to the destination channel The original channel data is maintained DESTINATION Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed E CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments To display the channels 9 16 Press the F button to toggle between the two channel displays Channels 1 8 and Channels 9 16 Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously While holding the G ALL CH button press one of the 1 A W 8 A V buttons SETUP menu The current settings of the Mixing Console page 88 displays and other panel set tings can be recorded to t
140. Press the EXIT button to close the TRANSPOSE display CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics and Text on external monitor This convenient sing along function lets you have the music score shown on the display of the instrument for your playing purposes while only the lyrics are shown on a separate external monitor page 56 so your audience can sing along 1 can up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 b SCREEN OUT 2 Press the 3 A 4A button to select LYRICS Making Announcements Between Songs This function is ideal for making announcements between your singing performances When singing a song several effects are usually assigned to the MIC Setup When speaking to your audience however these effects may sound dis turbing or unnatural Whenever the TALK function is turned on effects are automatically turned off 1 call up the operation display FUNCTION G MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY 2 Press the 2 A 3 A TALK button to turn the function on BO Talk settings can be customized as well allowing you to add any desired effects to your voice as you speak to your audi ence page 174 TALK OFF 1 MIC EFFECT OFF VOCAL HARMONY ON VOCAL HARMONY TYPE MIC EFFECT VOCAL HARMONY a CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 59 Recording Your Performance as Audio USB
141. R CHORDAL TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro phone sound when the Harmony mode page 173 is set to CHORDAL HARMONY GENDER TYPE Determines whether the gender of the harmony sound is changed or not Off The gender of the harmony sound is not changed Auto The gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically LEAD GENDER TYPE Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound i e the direct microphone sound will be changed Please note that the number of harmony notes differs depending on the selected type When set to Off three harmony notes are pro duced Other settings produce two harmony notes Off No gender change occurs Unison No gender change occurs You can adjust the LEAD GENDER DEPTH below Male The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal Female The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal LEAD GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change This is available when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off The higher the value the more feminine the harmony voice becomes The lower the value the more masculine the voice LEAD PITCH CORRECT This parameter is only effective when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off When Smooth or Hard is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps UPPER GENDER THRESH OLD Gen
142. RIATION ON OFF parameter VIBRATO ON OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels 1 low 2 mid or 3 high FOOTAGE 16 gt 5 1 3 Which footage 16 or 5 1 3 is operated with the 1 A W button can be switched by pressing the D button 16 1 Determines the basic sound of the organ flutes The longer the pipe the lower the pitch of the sound Hence the 16 setting determines the low est pitched component of the Voice while the 1 setting determines the highest pitched component The higher the value of the setting the greater the volume of the corresponding footage Mixing various vol umes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds VOLUME ATTACK VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes The longer the graphic bar the greater the volume RESP Affects both the attack and release page 102 portion of the sound increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release based on the FOOTAGE controls The higher the value the slower the swell and release VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On Off and Vibrato Depth above MODE The MODE control selects between two modes FIRST and EACH In the FIRST mode attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously while the first notes
143. Right 1 Right 2 Left Song parts Style parts e Input from a microphone guitar or other instrument via the MIC LINE IN jack e Input from another audio device such as a CD player MP3 player or the like via the MIC LINE IN jack BIT Songs protected by copyright such as preset songs and the metronome sound cannot be recorded Moreover the effect of the soundboad is not reflected in the recording Also the Sustain Samples which simulate resonance of piano strings with the damper pedal down cannot be recorded when the iAFC effect page 82 is on If you want to record the Sustain Samples turn the iAFC effect off The recorded data using this function is saved as e Stereo WAV data e 44 1 kHz sample rate 16 bit resolution Recording Your Performance as Audio Now try recording a performance of your singing along with Song playback with a connected microphone The maxi mum amount of recording time is 80 minutes though this may differ depending on the capacity of the particular USB storage device 1 set the desired Voice etc which you want to use for your performance and connect a microphone For information on setting the Voice see page 28 for connecting a microphone see page 54 Here you ll also see by example how to sing along with accompaniment Style playback To set the Style go on to step 6 page 46 2 Connect the USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal BM e To record your performance by USB Audi
144. S button then the EXIT button LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 25 Operation of the File Selection Display In the File Selection display you can select the Voice page 28 Song page 35 Style page 44 etc In the example here well call up and use the Song Selection display ICH Pop amp Rock Io Movie amp Show Io Traditional Io ClassicalRepert ID ChristmasFavori ID EasyPlay E chitdren sciassi C FoiowLignts _ Standards Io Sing a long PI SONG SELECT SONG COPY 4 aoe tel w Gel O D v v v v v v v v 5 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 1 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song Selection display 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the desired drive PRESET USER USB About PRESET USER USB PRESET iepr Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data USER rien Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data USB enge ergeece USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk drive etc which is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal RO Hereafter in this manual any USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk etc will be referred to as USB storage device 3 Select a folder if necessary Several Songs may be together in a folder In this case the folder s will appear in the display see the illustration E poprock
145. T PIANO RESET button page 29 Playing the Piano Voice Here we ll call up and play the piano voice You can play the piano voice using the pedals or metronome 28 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual One touch Piano Play This convenient easy to use feature completely and automatically reconfigures the entire instrument for optimum piano performance No matter what settings you ve made from the panel you can instantly call up the piano settings by a single button press Press the piano shaped PIANO RESET button on the lower right of the panel PIANO RESET e O Piano Lock Function The convenient Piano Lock function lets you lock the piano so that you don t inadvertently change the settings by pressing another button on the panel Once locked the instrument stays in the piano mode even if other buttons are pressed preventing you from accidentally starting a Song page 35 during your piano performance 1 Press and hold down the PIANO RESET button on the lower right of the panel for three seconds or longer until a message appears prompting you to enable Piano Lock 2 Press the F OK button to enable Piano Lock 3 To turn Piano Lock off press and hold down the PIANO RESET button again for three seconds or longer Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard You can adjust the touch response of the instrument how the sound responds to the way you play the keys The touch sensitivity type becomes the co
146. TAB gt button to select subsequent pages 3 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback The ball bounces along through the score indicating the current position A Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback Changing the Notation Display You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal preferences 6 SCORE Greensleeves 1 Press the SCORE button to display the music nota tion 2 Changing the following settings as desired Changing the size of the music notation Press the 7 A W button to change the size of the music notation Displaying only right hand part left hand part notation a H H e H e e s Press the 1 A W 2 A W button to disable display of Am Anan wae the left hand part right hand part JIG GJ CJ RIGHT CHORD LYRICS ON OFF OFF Customizing the notation display e Display the note name at the left of the note 1 Press the 5 A V NOTE button to display the note name 2 Press the 8 A V SET UP button to call up the detailed setting display 3 Press the 6 W NOTE NAME button to select Fixed Do 4 Press the 8 A OK button to apply the setting e Turn on the note colors Press the 6 A W button to turn the COLOR on RO About the note colors These colors are fixed for each note and cannot be changed C red D yellow E green F orange G blue A purple and B gray Increase the
147. TION Do not use the outer recess for the longer stay doing so could make the lid unstable and may cause it to fall resulting in damage or injury Ahh CAUTION e Make sure that the end of the stay fits securely in the lid recess If the stay is not properly seated in the recess the lid may fall caus ing damage or injury Be careful that you or oth ers do not bump the stay while the lid is raised The stay may be bumped out of the lid recess causing the lid to fall Be careful to avoid catching fingers yours or others especially children s when raising or lowering the lid Do not place any objects on the soundboard or the jer sey cloth part doing so may disturb the sound and even damage the instrument Ab CAUTION Do not listen with the head phones at high volume for long periods of time Doing so may cause hearing loss Ahh CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger Otherwise the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 17 UOID2mDOIU Changing the Display Language Changing the Display Language This determines the language used in the display for messages file names and character input 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt OWNER E be Q 3 ge e p 5 E 2 18 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Press the 4A W 5 A W button to select a language LCD CONTRAST
148. Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finland Tel 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini N ringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 IS 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstra e 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstra e 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16 513 P O Box 17328 Jubel Ali Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha M
149. To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially avail able dry type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail ability of proper headcleaning disks About Floppy Disks Handle floppy disks with care and fol low these precautions e Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use e Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight extremely high or low temperatures or excessive humidity dust or liq uids e Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields such as those produced by televisions speakers motors etc since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk rendering it unreadable Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or hous ing Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location To Protect Your Data Write protect Tab e To prevent accidental erasure of important data slide the disk s write protect tab to the protect position tab open When saving data make sure that the disk s write protect tab is set to the overwrite position tab closed Write protect tab open protect posit
150. True Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley Copyright 1956 by Unart Music Corporation and Elvis Presley Music Inc Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co and Chrysalis Songs International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Edelweiss from THE SOUND OF MUSIC Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Music by Richard Rodgers Copyright 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright Renewed WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through out the world International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Fly Me To The Moon In Other Words featured in the Motion Picture ONCE AROUND Words and Music by Bart Howard TRO Copyright 1954 Renewed Hampshire House Publishing Corp New York NY International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Including Public Performance For Profit Used by Permission Hey Jude Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright 1968 Sony ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony ATV Music Publishing 8 Music Square West Nashville TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Hound Dog Words and Music by Jerry Leiber and Mike Stoller Copyright 1956 by Elvis Presley Music Inc and Lion Publishing Co Inc Copyright Renewed Assigned to Gladys Music and Universal MCA Music Publishing A Division of Universal Studios Inc Al
151. Turning the power off Press the POWER switch to turn the power off The screen and the power indicator turn off 7 Closing the panel Grip the rim at the top of the panel and pull the key cover down to close it Ab CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when closing the cover 8 Closing the keycover N CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when closing the cover CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 15 Setting Up SG 5 a me e 5 E To turn on the iAFC page 82 open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay the iAFC will not be turned on Music Rest To Raise the Music Rest 1 Gently open the front portion of lid 2 Pull the music rest up and toward yourself until it goes at your favorite angle 3 Gently lower the music rest so that it rests at the angle To Lower the Music Rest 1 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go 2 While pulling the support and gen tly lowering the music rest back ward until it is all the way down Lid Ah CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid Use one of them to open the lid to the desired angle E To open the lid 1 Raise and hold the right side of the lid viewed from the keyboard end of the instrument 2 Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the
152. UP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory resettings Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display to the original factory status USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types user master EQ types user master compressor types and user vocal harmony types cre ated via the Mixing Console display to the original factory resettings MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data all records to the original factory resettings FILES amp FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders stored in the User tab display REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected Bank The same can be done also by turning the POWER button ON while holding the B6 key right most B key on the keyboard eC G A UTILITY A TOWNER Y SYSTEM RESET SYSTEM SETUP FILES F MIDI SETUP G FILES The Factory Reset operation does not reset certain parameters such as the Language setting and Owner Name To reset those load USER EFFECT H the preset System Setup file FILES MUSIC FINDER H e FILES CAUTION Li we All User files and folders are lost MARK ven FILES am
153. Voice and chord sec s Voice RIGHT tand 2 tion of the keyboard by using H Voice LEFT Chord section TOS STYLE in the display and you can Press the H S button or the G L button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial specify the Split Point of the left Split Point L cannot be set lower than Split Point S and Split Point S cannot be and right Voices by using LEFT set higher than Split Point L CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 111 N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt e 5 ka o E D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob c lt 7 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style MIXING CONSOLE Clear the search criteria To clear the entered Music Key word Style press the F G H CLEAR button 112 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Editing the Volume and Tonal Bal ance of the Style MIXING CONSOLE You can set various mixing related parameters of the Style See Adjustable items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE display on page 90 Call up the STYLE PART display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination MIXING CONSOLE on page 88 and follow the instructions Convenient Music Finder feature Music Finder page 52 is a convenient feature that calls up pre programmed panel settings for Voices Styles etc that match the song or type of music you want to play The
154. W ICON button to call up the ICON display 6 Select the icon by using the A J buttons or 3 A W 5 A V buttons The ICON display includes several pages Press the TAB gt button to select different pages To cancel the operation press the 8 CANCEL button 7 Press the 8 A OK button to apply the selected icon Press the 8 A OK button to actually enter the new name Creating a New Folder This operation lets you create new folders Folders can be created named and organized as desired making it easier to find and select your original data 1 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to create a new folder 2 Press the 7 Y FOLDER button to call up the naming display for a new folder CASE 1 ABC2 DEF3 GHI4 JKLS MNO6 OK PQRS7 TUV8 WXYZ9 0 SYMBOL DELETE CANCEL 3 Input the name of the new folder page 73 72 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files folders and when entering the Keyword for Music Finder function website The method is much the same as entering names and numbers to a conventional mobile phone Entering characters should be done in the display shown below CASE 1 ABC2 DEF3 GHI4 JKLS MNO6 OK ICON PQRS7 TUV8 WXYZ9 0 SYMBOL
155. YLES recording press the STYLE CONTROL SYNC START button then play in the chord section of the keyboard A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 About Channels See page 147 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 145 s8u0s sunipy pue Bunea Suter L 00 be Do DD f me fe me f 6 DD Le oO L O ob Z D D Recording Your Performance Setting all of the 9 16 chan nels to REC simultaneously While holding the SONG REC button press the SONG EXTRA TRACKS STYLE button When selecting the MIDI part e Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1 16 is recorded When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record this records data only over the set MIDI channel meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel Recording each channel with the same tempo Use the Metronome function page 30 to record each channel with the same tempo Keep in mind that the metronome sound is not recorded Pausing and restarting your recording See page 145 146 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual While holdi
156. aay ka al Es KC 5 If you select the 1 16 tab in step 4 press the F button to select the channel for recording On Press the G button to call up the STEP RECORD display 7 Start Step Recording For recording melodies See page 149 For recording cho See page 156 L 00 be Do DD me fe me fe 6 DD B w v 2 V ob Z TD D 148 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Recording Melodies This section explains how to step record notes using three music score examples The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 148 3 5 KL mj 1 2 7 The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following opera tion step numbers Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display 1 Press the G button to select mf SONG CREATOR NewSong 4 4 1920PPQ STEP RECORD sl D eC m CA CD e 2 ges J Ie GI ape sl J GJ Git LJ amp 1 2 3 4 5 T 8 Press the H button to select Tenuto Press the I button to select normal note type Press the 6 A W button to select the quarter note length Om BR W NY Play the keys C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 and A3 in order according to the notation
157. age 187 Connection information Shows detailed information on the current connection CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 185 yOUsJa U BY 0 A IAIG Laoue au SUUD Operations in the Special Website Changing the Home Page In the default condition the top page of the special website is automatically set to be the Home page for the browser However you can specify any desired page on the special website to be the Home page 1 Open the page you wish to set as your new Home page 2 Press the 5 W SETTING button to call up the Internet Setting dis play 3 Press the TAB lt button to select the BROWSER tab INTERNET SETTING A az Encode Western European F Home page Yamaha Website 1 Set current page as Home Register C G Restore default Home Initialize Show images On Il H Time zone U K time GMT CONTROL MENU a aj Ce Colle d ER 1 4 5 6 Laz e A 5 6 gt lt A Press the 1 Y V button to select the setting Set current page as Home 5 Use the 2A W 3 A W EDIT buttons to actually set the selected page as your new Home page 6 To return to the browser press the 7 A W SAVE button To cancel press the 8 A W CANCEL button pen D C D g v e E gt Ka O D el oO gt O E gt ae V v E
158. ain Display and File Selection Display A new folder cannot be made in the PRESET tab Folder directories for the USER tab display In the USER tab display folder directories can contain up to four levels The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 2550 but this may differ depending on the length of the file names The maximum number of files folders which can be stored in a folder in the USER tab is 250 Renaming Files Folders This operation lets you rename files folders 1 Call up the display containing the file folder you want to rename 2 Press the 1 Y NAME button The pop up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display EST Select a file or folder to be renamed GA Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desired file folder A Press the 7 V OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Rename operation press the 8 W CANCEL button 5 Input the name characters of the selected file or folder page 73 The renamed folder file appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order 6 Press the 8 A OK button to actually enter the new name Selecting Custom Icons for Files Shown at the Left of File Name You can select custom icons for files shown at the left of file name 1 4 Operations are the same as the above Renaming Files Folders section 5 Press the 1
159. alistic piano Voices Playing Preset Voices The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders VOICE category selection buttons on the panel correspond to the categories of the preset Voices For example press the PLANO button to display various piano Voices VOICE CONTROL O PIANO QOEPIANO STRINGS SUTAR O SAXOPHONE O wadii O ORGAN O TRUMPET BRASS ACCORDION O PEG O SYNTHAFX oe O eas EE RO About the various Voices Refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet 1 Use the A B F G RIGHT1 buttons in the Main display to select the RIGHT 1 part Make sure the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 SPLIT LEFT buttons are off The Voice selected here is the RIGHT 1 part For the Voice part see page 79 TRANSPOSE SONG STYLE LEFT RHICHTI RIGHT2 Determining how the Voice selection display is opened when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed You can select how the Voice selection display is opened when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 b gt CONFIG 2 2 Select the B 2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS button and use the 1 A W 2 A W buttons to change how the Voice selection display is opened e OPEN amp SELECT Opens the Voice selection display with the top first voice of the voic
160. all appropriate panel set tings to let you play in that music style A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one page 114 MUSIC FINDER ia D o QUUUU o tirg ooti ese 00000 0000 000 600 Le Lee Too dei Di o od RO The data records of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back 1 Press the MUSIC FINDER button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display 2 Nights In A Big City 40 sBigBand 69 Summers Long PowerRock 4 4 2 MUSIC FINDER A Bridge To Cross Troubled PowerBallad 4 4 __78 SORT ORDER A Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 4 4 A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad 4i4 A Feeling Of Love Tonight MovieBallad 4 4 gt A Fire Lighter Unplugged1 4 4 A Misty Ballad CoolJazzBallad_ 4 4 A Nickel In The Nickelodeon Dixieland2 ER A Night In A Wonderful Land 6 80rchestral 6 8 A Night KANE A Night Of Music BroadwayBallad 4 4 JZ FINDER A Sad Song To Make Jude Be LoveSong 4i4 NUMBER OF A Song For New England VintageGtrPop 4 4 RECORDS A Spy Does It Better PianoBallad MUSIC STYLE SEARCH 2 Press the TAB lt button to select the ALL tab The ALL tab contains the preset records eege A S
161. all up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 STOP PLAY PAUSE REW FF lt lt gt gt Multi Track Recording A Song consists of 16 separate channels With this method you can record data to each channel independently one by one Both Keyboard and Style parts can be recorded 1 Press the SONG REC and SONG STOP buttons simultaneously A blank Song New Song is called up for recording Select Voices for recording the keyboard parts RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and or LEFT page 32 page 80 page 81 Select a Style for recording also as necessary page 45 Example Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2 part to the channel 2 Turn the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 button on Then call up Voice Selection display and select a voice for the RIGHT 2 part page 80 REC STOP PLAY PAUSE e D Kan L NEJ SYNC START Recording Your Performance Using the metronome You can record your perfor mance while playing back the metronome page 30 But the metronome sound is not recorded Pausing and restarting your recording To pause recording press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button during recording To restart recording follow the operations shown below e For recording to TRACK 1 TRACK 2 recording press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button e For recording to EXTRA TRACKS ST
162. an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug 4 Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual on the name plate or specifically recommended by Yamaha 5 e WARNING Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over power or connect ing cords of any kind The use of an extension cord is not recom mended If you must use an extension cord the minimum wire size for a 25 cord or less is 18 AWG NOTE The smaller the AWG number the larger the current handling capacity For longer extension cords consult a local electrician 6 Ventilation Electronic products unless specifically designed for enclosed installations should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required 7 Temperature considerations Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature Placement of this product close to heat sources such as radiators heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided 8 This product was NOT designed for use in wet damp
163. ange the rotat ing speed slow fast of the rotary speaker effect Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard Selecting the Harmony Echo type You can select the desired Harmony Echo effect from a variety of types In order to make the type you ve selected here effective set HARMONY ECHO to On in the display shown in step 4 above Call up the operation display by pressing the J TYPE SELECT button 2 Use the 1 A W 3 A V buttons to select the Harmony Echo type page 87 3 Use the 4A W 8 A W buttons to select various Harmony Echo set tings page 88 The available settings differ depending on the Harmony Echo type Harmony Echo Types The Harmony Echo types are divided into the following groups depending on the particular effect applied Harmony Types These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right hand sec tion of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the left hand sec tion of the keyboard Note that the 1 5 and Octave settings are not affected by the chord STANDARD DUET Echo Types These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo Multi Assign Type This type applies a special effect to chords played in the right hand section of the keyboard Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected the Harmony effect is applied to notes played in the
164. aracters which are not accompanied by special character marks with the excep tion of kanakan and half size katakana you can call up the mark list by pressing the 6 W button after selecting a charac ter before actual entry of a char acter CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 73 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings e Inserting a Character 1 Move the cursor to the desired position Use the same operation as in Deleting Characters above 2 Press the 2 A W 6 A W 7 A buttons to enter numbers and sym bols 3 Press the 8 A OK button to enter characters Entering a Space 1 Move the cursor to the desired position Use the same operation as in Deleting Characters above 2 Press 6 W button to call up the mark list 3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space blank of the mark list and press the 8 A OK button Entering numbers First select one of the following A B C full size alphabet ABC CASE half size capital alphabet and case half size lowercase alphabet Then press and hold down the appropriate button 2 A Y 5 A V 6 A and 7 A button for a while or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected Converting into Kanji Japanese language When the entered hiragana characters are shown in reverse display highlighted press the 1 A ENTER button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji To actually enter
165. ard part TRANSPOSE Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch KEY BOARD Song playback SONG or overall sound of the instru ment MASTER respectively EFFECT TYPE Select the desired effect type page 93 After editing various parameters for the selected effect type you can save it as an orig inal effect REVERB Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or chan nel CHORUS Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or chan nel DSP Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE EQ Equalizer TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the per formance environment page 95 This affects the overall sound of the instrument EDIT For editing the EQ page 95 EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated boosted for each part EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated boosted for each part CMP Master Compressor See page 97 This affects the overall sound of the instrument Song Auto Revoice This feature lets you use the high quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage with XG compatible song data When you play back any commercially available XG song data or that created on other instruments you can use Auto Revoice to automatically assign the specially created Voices of the instrument N
166. ata in the Song Selection display page 69 Editing Note or Chord Events CHORD 1 16 The explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1 16 tab displays in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 158 1 2 When the 1 16 tab display is selected press the F button to select the channel to be edited Move the cursor to the desired data To move the cursor up or GOWN eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Use the A B button To move the cursor to the top data Press the C button To move the cursor by Measure Beat Clock units Use the 1 A W 3 A W buttons Edit the data Editing the data line by line Use the 6 A W 8 A buttons to cut copy paste insert delete the events Editing each parameter of the data 1 Use the D E buttons to select the parameter to be edited 2 Use the 4A W 5 A V buttons to edit the parameter value The DATA ENTRY dial can also be used To actually enter an edited value simply move the cursor away from the parameter To restore the original value press the 8 W CANCEL button before move the cursor When the CHORD tab display is selected press the F EXPAND but ton to convert the data into Song data Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 Recording Your Performance A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power t
167. atural Live Cool etc instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type 1 3 Same operation as in the Basic Procedure on page 88 In step 2 select the VOL VOICE tab 4 Press the G SETUP button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP dis play s 2104 Supp pue Buea BUISN 5 Use the 1 A W 3 A V buttons to select the Voice to be replaced MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART AUTO REVOICE SETUP VOICE NAME REVOICE TO GRAND PIANO BRIGHT PIANO NO REVOICE ELEC GRAND PNO NO REVOICE PIANO l REVOICE REWOICE F HONKYTONK NO REVOICE EL PIANO 1 NO REVOICE CT FF EL PIANO 2 NO REVOICE J HARPSICHORD NO REVOICE BASIC I CLAVI NO REVOICE REVOICE CELESTA NO REVOICE ALL NO VIBRAPHONE NO REVOICE W lo REVOICE TO VOICE NAME Ka 6 Use the 4A W 6A YW buttons to select the Voice for replacing the XG selected in step 5 Several different Revoice settings are available by using the F G I but tons for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one action ALL REVOICE Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the high quality Voices of the instrument PIANO REVOICE Replaces only the piano Voices BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suit able for playing back the song ALL NO REVOICE All Voices a
168. ay appears showing the results of the search To cancel searching press the 8 W CANCEL button Searching other music genres When you want to search other music genres press the 6 W SEARCH 2 button in the Music Finder display The search result is displayed in the SEARCH 2 display Calling up the panel settings to match the style REPERTOIRE When searching by style name the same search result is obtained even if the search is done by using the Repertoire function See page 53 for details Entering several different key words You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator comma between each CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 113 s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Bunea Suen N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt e 5 ka o E D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob E Ed Convenient Music Finder feature Ah CAUTION You can also change a preset record to create a new one If you want to keep the original preset make sure to change the name and register the edited record as a new record see step 5 page 115 114 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Creating a Set of Favorite Records As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder records you may want to create a folder of favorite records so you can quickly call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your
169. button to select the edit menu page 128 CHANNEL RHYTHM2 1 PLAY ROOT STYLE CREATOR Classic8Beat J essre Essen Y GROOVE d NTR ROOT FIXED CHANNEL Y PARAMETER CHORD M7 NTT BYPASS HIGH KEY Fe NOTE LIMIT LOW C 2 HIGH G3 CHANNEL RTR PITCH SHIFT PLAY ROOT PLAY CHORD Style Creator Editing of Style File Format data is related only to note conver sion Editing the rhythm chan nels has no effect CGP 1000 Owner s Manual s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Bunea Suen N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt O 5 ka o E D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob c lt 7 Style Creator Ah CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation Auditioning Your Style with a Specific Chord Normally in the Style Creator you can hear your original Style in process with the Source Pat tern However there is a way to hear it played by a specific chord and root To do this set NTR to Root Fixed NTT to Bypass and NTT BASS to OFF then change the newly displayed Play Root and Play Chord parameters to the desired set tings 128 CGP 1000
170. by Ned Washington Music by Victor Young Copyright 1946 Renewed 1973 1974 by Famous Music Corpora tion International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Take The A Train Words and Music by Billy Strayhorn Copyright 1941 Renewed 1969 DreamWorks Songs ASCAP and Billy Strayhorn Songs Inc ASCAP for the U S A Rights for DreamWorks Songs and Billy Strayhorn Songs Inc Adminis tered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company Inc International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Tears In Heaven Words and Music by Eric Clapton and Will Jennings Copyright 1992 by E C Music Ltd and Blue Sky Rider Songs All Rights for E C Music Ltd Administered by Unichappell Music Inc All Rights for Blue Sky Rider Songs Administered by Irving Music Inc International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved That Old Black Magic from the Paramount Picture STAR SPANGLED RHYTHM Words by Johnny Mercer Music by Harold Arlen Copyright 1942 Renewed 1969 by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved 222 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual That s Amore That s Love from the Paramount Picture THE CADDY Words by Jack Brooks Music by Harry Warren Copyright 1953 Renewed 1981 by Paramount Music Corporation and Four Jays Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Up Where We Belong from the Paramount Picture AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN Words by Will Jennings Music b
171. c8Beat Bar 1 BASIC Sal SECTION MAIN A REC C3 8 A PATTERN LENGTH 4 LJ e CH TL RECORD CJ Call up the Voice Selection display by using the 1 A 8 A buttons and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display To delete a channel simultaneously hold down the J DELETE but ton and press the appropriate numbered button 1 A 8 A You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again before releasing your finger from the J button Start recording by pressing the Style Control START STOP button Playback of the specified section starts Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop you can record individual sounds one by one listening to the previous sounds as they play For information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels RHY1 2 refer to the section Rules when recording non rhythm channels see below To continue recording with another channel simultaneously hold down the F REC CH button and press the appropriate 1 W 8 V button to specify the channel then play the keyboard Stop recording by pressing the Style Control START STOP button Call up the display for selecting sections etc by pressing the EXIT button Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to
172. cals to Your VOICEs soso eysrcseersscesteenene page 57 Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch Vocal CueTIME page 142 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own NS WIELER page 58 Changime the ele page 58 Displaying the Music Score on Instrument and Lyrics on TV page 59 Making Announcements Between Sons coooa page 59 Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice Karao Key page 142 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters This section explains briefly how to create your own Vocal Harmony page 57 types and lists the detailed parameters for editing Up to ten Vocal Harmony types can be created and saved Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt G MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY 2 Press the H VOCAL HARMONY TYPE button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE selection display 1 TALK OFF 7 E K 1 MIC EFFECT OFF 5 E VOCAL HARMONY ON 3 i i m I rouges gt n Q f a gt CH oO TALK MIC EFFECT VOCAL HARMONY 2 CL SIE p e EZ oja EA a 4 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 167 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters 3 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type to be edited VOCAL HARMONY TYPE Il CountryQuar Astanu IEJ ClsdMenQuar EN Si MixAcapQuar 28 ClosedChoir__ LEN WomenChoir lN Giri puet EN JazzSisters Ti spdyMouse CU LI wll gt
173. can be connected to the AUX PEDAL jack and used to control various functions assigned page 191 Making Settings for the Pedals You can assign one of the various functions to the three pedals or an optional foot controller footswitch doing things like controlling the Super Articulation voices page 78 or starting and stopping the Style page 191 Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds 1 Press the METRONOME ON OFF button to start the metronome 2 To stop the metronome press the METRONOME ON OFF button again METRONOME COON OFF TRANSPOSE PD GIG v3 RESET CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound E Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 1 Press the TEMPO button to call up the pop up tempo setting display TEMPO S de 103 TAP TEMPO TEMPO vaa 2 Press the TEMPO buttons to set the tempo Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value You can also use the DATA ENTRY dial to adjust the value To reset the tempo press the TEMPO but tons simultaneously RO About the Tempo display The number in the display indicates how many quarter note beats there are in one minute The range is between 5 and 500 The higher the value the faster the tempo
174. can do so in the DSP menu explained on page 103 DSP ON OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VIBE VIBRATE is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained on page 93 Determines whether VIBE VIBRATE should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice Voice Creating Voice Set 2 DSP DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type Select a type after select ing a category VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type Here you can edit the VARIATION on off status and variation parameter value setting ON OFF The factory programmed assignments are set to variation off for all Voices standard variation of DSP is assigned If you select VARIATION ON here a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to the Voice The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the VALUE menu explained below PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter 3 EQ EQ LOW HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands HARMONY Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together Select the Right 1 part page 32 step 1 in the Main display before you set it This has the same settings as the display of Selecting the Harmony Echo type on page 87 in step 1 Sa010A Supp pue Buea 2Zutsn Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices The instrument features a variety of lush dynamic
175. can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corpo ration of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter minal of the three pin plug 2 wires This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd class B COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE Responsible Party Address Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 Telephone 714 522 9011 Type of Equipment Electronic Piano Model Name CGP 1000 This device complies wit
176. chord name will not be displayed in the Main display during Song playback CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 139 s8u0s sunipy pue Bunea Suter Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination etc MIXING CONSOLE Reading Song data automatically when connecting a USB stor age device You can have the instrument automatically call up the first Song not con tained in a folder on a USB storage device as soon as the device is con nected in the USB TO DEVICE terminal 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 b gt MEDIA 2 Press the 3 A 4 4 SONG AUTO OPEN button to select ON Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination etc MIXING CONSOLE You can set the mixing related parameters of a Song Refer to the section Adjust About the SONG CH 1 8 able items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE display on page 90 Call up the SONG CH 9 16 displays SONG CH 1 8 or SONG CH 9 16 display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in E Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination MIXING CONSOLE on channels Separate settings can be made for ae of the o chan page 88 Below are two operation examples nels in the MIXING CONSOLE display Adjust the parameters in the SONG CH 1 80rSONGCH Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel 9 16 display respectively Usu ally CH 1 is assigned to the TRACK 1 button CH 2 is assigned to the TRACK 2 but ton an
177. cified channel accord CHANGE ing to the percentage specified here BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel SOURCE specifies the first TOP and last LAST measures in the region to be copied DEST specifies the first measure of the destination location to which the data is to be copied BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel 126 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Making Style File Format Settings PARAMETER Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File Format Source Pattern SOURCE ROOT Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern SOURCE CHORD Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern Chord change via the chord section of the keyboard Note Transposition NTR Note Transposition Rule applied to the Chord Root change NTT Note Transposition Table applied to the Chord Type change 4 Other Settings HIGH KEY Upper limit of the octaves of the note transposing caused by the Chord Root change NOTE LIMIT Note range in which the note is sounded RTR Retrigger Rules that determine how notes held through chord changes will be handled Output The Style File Format SFF combines all of Yamaha s auto accompanimen
178. ck the connection e If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard refer to the assem bly diagrams and retighten all screws When moving the instrument after assembly always hold the bottom of the main unit N CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion Improper han dling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury Top portion Key cover p SCH Do not hold here Installing the Floppy Disk Drive Optional The floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws For a list of optional floppy disk drives available for this instrument see Optional Accesso ries page 215 Have a Phillips head screwdriver ready SoS Remove the three backing papers from the 3 i adhesive tape in the case and fit the floppy disk Attach the drive and case assembly to the left drive into the case underside of the instrument using the included four screws 4 mm x 10 mm Insert the drive to the case with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case A Connect the USB cable to the USB TO DEVICE terminal Dual sided adhesive tape 2 Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown x pu ddy CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 213 Ba D c bp bi CG ka Specifications Sound Source CGP 1000 AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling NW Natural
179. connected to the Internet page 179 press the MUSIC FINDER button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display 2 Use the 1 A W 5 A V buttons in the display to select the record for which you want to view information on the Web You can also use the DATA ENTRY dial to make a selection After using the dial to make a selection press ENTER 3 Press the J MUSIC FINDER button to open the Web page MUSIC FINDER Favorite MUSIC STYLE BEAT TEMPO A 2 Nights In A Big City 40 sBigBand_ 4 4 PEDEN F 69 Summers Long PowerRock aia A Bridge To Cross Troubled PowerBallad Am SORT ORDER s A Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 4 4 ASCENDING E A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad ana c A Feeling Of Love Tonight MovieBaliaa 4 4 ol IDDM Ch A Fire Lighter Unpluggedt sa D A Misty Ballad CoolJazzBallad 4 4 TEMPO LOCK i A Nickel In The Nickelodeon Dixieland2 ana or A Night In A Wonderful Land 6 8Orchestral 6 8 TE i A Night Of Musie BroadwayBallad 4 4 SET 3 A Sad Song To Make Jude Be LoveSong ana aa A Song For New England VintageGtrPop 4 4 RECORDS A Spy Does It Better PianoBallad 4 4 1o06 O A MUSIC STYLE SEARCH gt z lees Dec 4 Press the EXIT button to exit the browser screen and return to the MUSIC FINDER display S
180. corded performance is reproduced by the sequencer playing back the song data using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds including that of a piano Looked at in another way the relation of the sequencer and the tone genera tor is similar to that of the pianist and the piano one plays the other Since digital instruments handle play back data and the actual sounds independently we can hear our piano performance played by another instru ment such as guitar or violin l2 NOTE Even though it is a single musical instrument the instrument can be thought of as containing several electronic components a con troller a tone generator and a sequencer Connecting a Computer or USB Device What is MIDI Finally well take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds For example let s say you play a C quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument s keyboard Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note the electronic instrument puts out infor mation from the keyboard such as with what voice with which key about how strong when was it pressed and when was it released Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator Using these numbers as a basis for sound generation the tone generator plays the stored sampled note n u Exampl
181. corre 1 Q Is NewRegist IS NewRegist sponds to the F 7 S S REGISTRATION O oe ID NewRegist MEMORY 1 8 Ia NewRegist buttons O NewRegist IS _ NewBank a Cp ES a D 1 2 3 4 6 7 Ly J E 5 Press the 8 A UP button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display sdnjas jaueg WON Buey pue BulJa sIsay Disabling Recall of Specific Items Freeze Func tion Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press However there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same even when switching Registration Memory setups For example you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style This is where the Freeze function comes in handy It lets you maintain the set tings of certain items and leave them unchanged even when selecting other Regis tration Memory buttons 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt E REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET gt TAB lt 4 P FREEZE CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 133 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups 2 Press the 2 A V 7 A W buttons to select items Z CAUTION Settings in the REGISTRATION FREEZE display are automati cally saved to the instrument 3 when you exit from this dis 4 5 Enter checkmarks for the items to be Fr
182. ct Song or Style playback E MESSAGE SW SYS EX The Tx setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Sys tem Exclusive messages on or off The Rx setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclu sive messages generated by external equipment on or off CHORD SYS EX The Tx setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data chord detect root and type on or off The Rx setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmit Settings The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 200 This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent MIDI RECEIVE mer Y CHORD DETECT Y SYSTEM TRANSMIT RE GI PART CHANNEL NOTE CC PC RIGHT2 MIDI USB CH2 ww leiwe F LEFT MIDI USB CH3 AA E UPPER OFF rl See Pitre aaa LOWER OFF e E Pee STYLE RHYTHM1 MIDI USB CH9 we AE AE STYLE RHYTHM2 MIDI USB CHI w w w w STYLE BASS MIDI USB wE we W yr 12 34567 8 9 1011 1213 14 1516 MIDI USB CONTROL PROGRAM PITCH AFTER Transmit NOTE CHANGE CHANGE BEND TOUCH PART CHANNEL W MARK oe fi oe Tee gt ES asd Bd Cal Ce Operation
183. cticing with the Repeat Playback Function The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult to play phrases Playing Back a Song Repeatedly 1 2 3 Select a Song page 35 Press the REPEAT button to turn on Repeat playback Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG STOP button 4 Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback Press the REPEAT button to turn off Repeat playback Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeat edly A B Repeat 1 2 3 Select a Song page 35 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback Specify the repeat range Press the REPEAT button at the starting point A of the range to be repeated Press the REPEAT button again at the ending point B After an automatic lead in to help guide you into the phrase the range from Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly DETA Instantly returning to Point A Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped pressing the STOP button returns to Point A 4 Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback Press the REPEAT button to turn off Repeat playback CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 41 a 7 See E PI Other Methods for Specifying the A B Repeat Range Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stoppe
184. d 1 Press the FF button to advance to the Point A location 2 Press the REPEAT button to specify Point A 3 Press the FF button to advance to the Point B location 4 Press the REPEAT button again to specify Point B Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song Recording Your Performance Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature This is an effective practice tool allowing you to easily compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing You can also use it to practice duet pieces by yourself if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand 1 Press the REC and STOP buttons simultaneously A blank Song for recording is automatically set O REC STOP O PLAY PAUSE ms Ni SYNC START 2 Select a Voice page 32 The selected Voice will be recorded 3 Press the REC button O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE D D IEW SONG SYNC START A start recording Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard 5 Press the SONG STOP button to stop recording A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears To close the message press the EXIT button O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE e Kan NE SYNC START 6 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to play back the recorded
185. d CH 3 16 are assigned to the EXTRA TRACKS button respectively Select a Song page 35 Press the MIXING CONSOLE button to call up the MIXING CON SOLE display Select the VOL VOICE tab by pressing the TAB lt gt buttons Press the MIXING CONSOLE button repeatedly to call up the display of SONG CH 1 8 or SONG CH 9 16 Press the C H VOICE but tons in step 5 to select the Voice which you want to change Then press one of the 1 A W to 8 A gl buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the channel Press the J button to select the VOLUME Adjust the volume balance of each channel by using the 1 A W 8 A V buttons L 00 be Do DD f me fe me f 5 DD Le oO L O ob Z D D N Ann AOU N You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation of the SETUP page 162 Make sure to checkmark the VOLUME item in step 2 of the Setup proce dure 140 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Using the Practice Function Guide Changing Voices 1 4 The operation steps are the same as in the Adjusting the Volume 5 6 7 8 Balance of Each Channel see page 140 Press the H button to select the VOICE Press one of the 1A W 8 A V buttons to call up the Voice selec tion display for the channel Press one of the A J buttons to select a Voice You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song i
186. d parts of an existing Song Preset Song or a Song on USB storage device with your own performance Realtime Recording Step Recording This method lets you compose your performance by writing gt page 147 it down one event at a time This is a non realtime manual recording method similar to writing music notation onto paper You can input notes chords and other events one by one realtime performance is not needed Step Recording You can also edit Songs after they ve been recorded page 158 For example you can edit specific notes one by one or you can use the Punch In Out function to re record a specific part Recording Your Performance The microphone input signal can not be recorded Internal memory User tab displays capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 3 2MB This capacity applies to all file types including Voice Style Song and Registration data files CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 143 s8u0s sunipy pue Bunea Suter Recording Your Performance Quick Recording This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance Press the SONG REC and SONG STOP buttons simultaneously A blank Song New Song is called up for recording O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE H H l FA ba NE SYNC START 2 Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance Below are some example settings you may want to try The RIGHT a
187. der change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones above the lead vocal pitch LOWER GENDER THRESH OLD Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch UPPER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD The higher the value the more feminine the harmony voice becomes The lower the value the more masculine the voice LOWER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD The higher the value the more feminine the harmony voice becomes The lower the value the more masculine the voice VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off VIBRATO RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off VIBRATO DELAY Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced Higher values result in a longer delay CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 169 auoydossiw e suis Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound HARMONY1 2 3 VOLUME Sets the volume of the first lowest second and third
188. der func tion page 60 Furthermore you can connect a recorder to the output terminals AUX OUT AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED and record the microphone signal Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone sound e Vocal Harmony is set to ON Turn Vocal Harmony off page 57 The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out of tune Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds such as the Style sound from the instrument In particular bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony To remedy this e Sing as closely to the microphone as possible e Use a directional microphone e Turn down the Master volume Style volume or Song volume control page 40 e Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possible e Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display page 171 e Raise the microphone input level TH via the Com pressor function in the MICROPHONE SETTING dis play page 172 Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature e Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Har mony mode page 173 USB Audio Recorder The message This drive is busy now appeared and then the recording was aborted e Make sure to use a compatible USB storage device page 22 e Make sure that the USB storage device has enough memory page 195 e If you are using a USB mem
189. device Prot 2 Edit Indicates edited Prot 2 Orig Songs Make sure to save these to the same folder containing the corresponding Prot 2 Orig Song These cannot be copied These can be moved saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device G P 5 ow a O vu o S o Note for Prot 2 Orig and Prot 2 Edit Song file operation Make sure to save the Prot 2 Edit Song to the same folder containing its original Prot 2 Orig Song Otherwise the Prot 2 Edit Song cannot be played back Also if you move a Prot 2 Edit Song be sure to move its original Prot 2 Orig Song to the same location folder at the same time Copying Files Folders Copy amp Paste This operation lets you copy a file folder and paste it to another location folder 1 Call up the display containing the file folder you want to copy 2 Press the 3 W COPY button to copy the file folder The pop up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the dis play OPY Select files and or folders to be S COPY copied to the clipboard ALL OFF 3 Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desired file folder To cancel the selection press the same A J button again E Selecting all files folders Press the 6 W ALL button to select all files folders indicated on the cur rent display including the other pages To cancel the selection press the
190. dia If so execute the Format operation Ab CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data Proceed with caution espe cially when connecting multiple USB storage medias CGP 1000 Owner s Manual e Though there are two USB TO DEVICE terminals on the instrument if you are connecting two or three devices at the same time such as two USB storage devices and a LAN adaptor you should use a USB hub device The USB hub must be self powered with its own power source and the power must be on Only one USB hub can be used If an error message appears while using the USB hub disconnect the hub from the instrument then turn on the power of the instrument and re connect the USB hub e Though the instrument supports the USB 1 1 standard you can connect and use a USB 2 0 storage device with the instrument However note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1 1 To protect your data write protect To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased apply the write protect provided with each storage device or media If you are saving data to the USB storage device make sure to disable write protect Quick Guide Playing the Demos The Demos are more than just songs they also provide helpful easy to understand introductions to the features functions and operations of the instrument In a way the Demos are an interactive
191. e quency bands and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types Bandwidth Gain also called Shape or Q Sa Freq Frequency Sbands gt LOWLOWMID MID HIGMID HIGH EQi EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5 E Select a Preset EQ type 1 3 Same operation as in the Basic Procedure on page 88 In step 2 select the EQ tab s 2104 Supp pue Buea BUISN A Use the A B buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your perfor mance music style or environment If you want to edit the EQ parameters go on to the next operation E Editing and Saving the selected EQ 5 Press the F EDIT button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display SONSOLE PANEL PART FILTER Y TUNE MASTER EQ JD PARTIEQ fi m UU SONG STYLE LEFT RIGHT RIGHT2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 95 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE 6 Use the A B buttons to select a preset EQ type On fi T O o DoDD m I EQ 1 FREQ EQ 1 7 Use the 3 A V 7 A W buttons to boost or cut each of the five bands Use the 8 A W button to boost or cut all the five bands at the same time Adjust the Q bandwidth and the FREQ center frequency of the band selected in step 7 e Bandwidth also called Shape or Q Use the 1 A W button The h
192. e audio cables for connection These jacks are located on the underside jacks panel of the instrument Ab CAUTION When the instrument s sound is output to an external device first turn on the power to the instrument then to the external device Reverse this order when you turn the power off Do not route the output from the AUX OUT AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED jacks to the AUX IN jacks If you make this connection the signal input at the AUX IN jacks is output from the AUX OUT AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED jacks These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible and may even damage both pieces of equipment AUX OUT Jacks Standard phone jacks of L L R and R When these are connected you can use the instru ment s MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the vol ume of the sound output to the external device Connect the instrument s AUX OUT L L R R jacks and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers using appropriate audio cables Use only the L L R jack for connection with a monaural device Instrument Powered speakers ollo VEL FIXED OHO OO O eo t t Input jack Phone plug standard Phone plug standard Audio cable SODIAV JAYIO YUM JUatUNAsU INOA SUIS CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 189 Kai EU D gt ov Q i o Ss zi O E 3 D i E o E 5 N 3 gt D I E o Connecting Audio amp
193. e Keyboard Data Voice number with what voice 1 grand piano Note number with which key 60 C3 Note on when was it pressed and note off when was it released Timing expressed numerically quarter note Velocity strength at which it was played 120 strong Panel operations on the instrument such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices are processed and stored as MIDI data The auto accompaniment Styles and Songs also consist of MIDI data MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other by send ing and receiving compatible Note Control Change Program Change and various other types of MIDI data or messages The instrument can control a MIDI device by transmit ting note related data and various types of controller data The instrument can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode select MIDI channels voices and effects change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts l2 NOTE MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data e The amount of data is much less e The data can be effectively and easily edited even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data MIDI messages can be divided into two groups Chan nel messages and System messages Channel Messages The instrumen
194. e O PIANO Oe pano Ostrincs O SIDD SAXOPHONE Cell Bur O ORGAN VOICE category selection but II II fr m tons Pres rana holdone VOILE O TRUMPET O me Oaccoroon O SRB O svnmarx O oferty O SIAN Q category selection button then 8 S press another The Voice of the Ro first pressed button is automati cally set for the Right 1 part fis while the Voice of the second E pressed button is set for the Right 3 Press the TAB lt button to select the PRESET display 2 part VOICE RIGHT2 KR D EEN Si an LEA armonica ob E E Master Accord D JazzAccordion Tango Accordion z Steirisch Accordion LC BS LI GI GIGI eIe SIS LJ GIG GTG3t H D d i 8 A Press one of the A J buttons to select a Voice 5 Play the keyboard Switching the Dual on off 6 Press the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 button again to turn it off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Dual on off when the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 is appro priately assigned page 191 This is useful for turning the Dual on and off while you play 80 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 and Left Parts You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 and Left parts by turning Split on Press the PART ON OFF SPLIT LEFT button to play different Voices with the Right and Left Hands Right
195. e Song Selection display page 69 E QUANTIZE menu The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel For example if you record the musical phrase shown at right you may not play it with absolute precision and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing Quantize is a conve nient way of correcting for this CHANNEL Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized SIZE Selects the quantize size resolution For optimum results you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel For example if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel you should use eighth note as the Quantize size TEETER D Settings D A A quarter eighth note sixteenth thirty second note note note a D 3 A 3 Das quarter eighth note sixteenth eighth note note triplet triplet note triplet eighth note triplet After eighth note quantization be A sixteenth note eighth note triplet A sixteenth note six teenth triplet The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks are exceptionally conve nient since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time For example when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel if you quantize by the straight eighth notes all notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes completely elimi
196. e Sound board System plus an iAFC Instrumental Active Field Control effect utilizing an actual piano soundboard along with a finely crafted grand piano cabinet to perfectly recreate the deep sonic resonances and subtle harmonics of a concert grand piano all in a full featured digital keyboard instrument The Hybrid Active Soundboard System uses a real soundboard and special Vibro trans ducers to effectively reproduce for the first time on a digital keyboard the full experi ence of playing a true grand piano This effect is NOT produced by speakers the soundboard resonates naturally and transmits both sound and vibration in the exact same way an actual grand piano does Advanced iAFC technology is also included on this instrument Turn on the iAFC effect and hear the sound expand around you as if you re playing on the stage in a concert hall The overall sound is deeper and more resonant especially when using the damper pedal recreating and emphasizing the natural sounds of acoustic instruments Audio Recording Recording Your Performance as AUCIO cccccsesseseeseseeees page 60 You can record your performance as audio data to a USB storage device Connect a microphone or guitar to the instrument and enjoy recording a gui tar and keyboard performance together or record your singing along with Song playback in karaoke fashion 10 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Playing the Instrument Playing Piano VOICES
197. e When connecting a USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE on the top panel remove it before closing the key cover If the key cover is closed with the USB stor age device connected the USB storage device may be damaged E be Q 3 ge e 5 E Compatible USB storage devices e Up to two USB storage devices such as a floppy disk drive hard disk drive CD ROM drive flash memory reader writer etc can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal If necessary use a USB hub The num ber of USB storage devices that can be used with musical instruments simultaneously even when a USB hub is used is amaximum of two This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used The instrument does not necessarily support all commer 22 cially available USB storage devices Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase Before purchasing USB storage devices please consult your Yamaha dealer or an authorized Yamaha distributor see list at end of the Owner s Man ual for advice or visit the following web page http music yamaha com homekeyboard Bi Although CD R RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument they cannot be used for saving data Formatting USB storage media e When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted a message may appear prompting you to format the device me
198. e background color is specified in the song data the Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed Performance assistant technology Performance assistant technology does not work appropriately e Press the SONG STOP button to stop Song playback then set the ACMP ON OFF and PART ON OFF LEFT to off Finally restart the Song Video out RGB out The instrument display contents cannot be sent via video out RGB out and do not show on an external monitor e Make sure that the NTSC PAL RGB setting corresponds to the standard of your particular equipment page 56 Some flashing parallel lines appear in the TV video or computer monitor e Occasionally some flashing parallel lines may appear in the television video or computer This does not neces sarily indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning For optimum results try adjusting the color settings on the monitor itself The monitor you are using may not show the instru ment s display contents as expected e Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as rec ommended the monitor you are using may not show the instrument s display contents as expected e g the dis play contents may not fit on the screen the characters may not be completely clear or the colors may be incor rect Microphone Vocal harmony The microphone input signal cannot be recorded e The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by Song Style recording Use the USB Audio Recor
199. e category automatically selected when one of the Voice category selection buttons is pressed With the default settings the OPEN amp SELECT function is turned on e OPEN ONLY Opens the Voice selection display with the currently selected voice when one of the VOICE category selection 2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice selection display VOICE CONTROL O Piano O EPIANO O STRINGS O BUI O SAXOPHONE O wooDWIND O ORGAN Cd i L CHOIR amp PAD PERC amp ORGAN OSYNTH amp FX O DRUM KIT O FLUTES J Cd O TRUMPET O BRASS O ACCORDION O J Cd Cd 32 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 3 Press one of the A J buttons to select the desired Voice You can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the 7 A INFORMATION button BETIA The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name For details on the characteris tics see page 78 VOICE RIGHT PRESET 8 Articulation 5 ES Sweet oncertStrings Violin i i yyy Natural Fd Celio vet r 7 eg Live P a DynamicStrings IR DiscoStrings1 Livet Fam Live 7 Spiccato ES DiscoStrings2 Natural Livet 7 E Strings Pizzicato Strings Pz BO You can instantly jump back to the original display by double clicking
200. e data is saved You can also select the specified file to which the data is saved by pressing the USB button USB gt A SONG gt A UJ Playing Songs in sequence You can play all Songs in a folder continuously l Select a Song in the desired folder 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt B SONG SETTING Press the H REPEAT MODE button to select ALL Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback All Songs in the folder play back continuously in order Press the SONG STOP button to stop continuous playback To turn off the Song sequence playback press the H button to select OFF in the display in step 2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Boost the volume of the part to be practiced On the instrument a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels Specify the channel for practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel l Select a Song The method for selecting a Song is the same as Playing Back Songs Before Practicing page 35 step 1 5 2 Press the MIXING CONSOLE button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART VOL VOICE SONG AUTO REVOICE MIXING CONSOLE 2 gt 2 4 SONG STYLE LEFT RIGHT RIGHT2 3 Press the TAB lt 4 gt buttons to select the VOL VOICE tab A Press the MIXING CONSOLE button until MIXING CONSOLE SONG CH1 8 is shown at the top of the dis play 5 Press the E
201. e left and right sections of the keyboard You can play different Voices with the left and right hands For example you can set up the keyboard to play the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand CGP 1000 Owner s Manual SONG CONTROL EXTRA TRACK2 TRACK1 LYRICS STOP O PLAY PAUSE REW F OR OTUs OMAN score YES eu OrePEAT JCI amp amp amp CG NEW SONG SYNC START BOG Song On the instrument performance data is called a Song Playing Back Songs Before Practicing The instrument includes not only the preset demo Songs but also many preset Songs This section covers basic infor mation on playing back the preset Songs or Songs in a CD ROM 1 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display SONG SELECT 2 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Song category The preset Songs are categorized and contained in appropriate folders io Pop amp Rock IC Movie amp Show IEN Traditional IC ClassicalRepert ID ChristmasFavori IN EasyPlay E children sClassi C Paien iepel Io Standards io Sing a long PI SONG COPY 3 Press one of the A J buttons to select the desired Song You can also select the file by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER button to execute BO You can
202. e settings there are two Split Points that separate the different sec tions of the keyboard the Chord section the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1 and 2 section The two Split Point settings below are specified as note names 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt C STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING gt TAB lt gt SPLIT POINT Hold down one of the right buttons and use the DATA ENTRY dial mmm 2 eC i EZ D Pot TT Fos E LCJ STYLE LEFT e Split Point S separates the Chord section for Style playback from the section s for playing Voices RIGHT 1 2 and LEFT e Split Point L separates the two sections for playing Voices LEFT and RIGHT 1 2 These two settings can be set to the same note as in the default or two different notes as desired Setting the Split Point S and the Split Point L to the same note Split Point S L v E A _ Chord section _ Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Kg Voice LEFT Press the F S L button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial Setting the Split Point S and the Split Point L to different notes s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Bunea Suen Split Point S Split Point L Specifying the Split Point by note name Y Press the 1 A W 4 4 W but H dk d d tons You can specify the Split Point of the
203. e step 8 Listen to your newly recorded performance Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to playback the performance you just recorded O REC STOP O PLAY PAUSE To record another channel repeat steps 2 through 6 Recording Your Performance 8 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display caution page 69 The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the About Song channels instrument off without exe Default channel part assignments are shown below cuting the Save operation page 69 Channels Default Parts Channels Keyboard parts 1 9 RHYTHM1 2 amp 10 RHYTHM2 o 3 S 11 BASS S 4 S 12 CHORD1 5 RIGHT1 a 13 CHORD2 a 6 S 14 PAD 7 7 a 15 PHRASE1 8 16 PHRASE2 About keyboard parts There are three keyboard parts RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and LEFT As the default the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1 8 Nor mally the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1 8 About Style parts As the default each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9 16 respectively as shown below Normally the Style parts should be recorded to the channels 9 16 RHYTHM This is the basic part of the Style containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns Usually one of the drum kits is used BASS uperena The bass part uses
204. earch criteria MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 MUSIC CLEAR KEYWORD CLEAR STYLE CLEAR BEAT SEARCH AREA a eg GENRE FROM TO START SEARCH CANCEL Convenient Music Finder feature e Search by song title or music genre MUSIC or keyword 1 Press the A MUSIC B KEYWORD button to call up the character entry display 2 Enter the song title or music genre or the keyword page 72 e Search by Style name 1 Press the C STYLE button to call up the Style selection display 2 Use the A J buttons to select a Style 3 Press the EXIT button to return to the search display e Adding other Search Criteria You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name keyword Style name BEAT sce coiiscietecetaeadceas sass Select the beat time signature you want to use in your performance by pressing the D button All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY SEARCH AREA Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing the E button These correspond to the tabs at the top of the Music Finder display TEMPO cresine Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your per formance by using the 1 A W 2 A W TEMPO but tons GENRE niies Select the desired music genre by using the 5 A W 6 A V GENRE buttons 5 Press the 8 A START SEARCH button to start the search The Search 1 displ
205. ecured All Rights Reserved Linus And Lucy By Vince Guaraldi Copyright 1965 LEE MENDELSON FILM PRODUCTIONS INC Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Love Story Theme from the Paramount Picture LOVE STORY Music by Francis Lai Copyright 1970 1971 Renewed 1998 1999 by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Lullaby Of Birdland Words by George David Weiss Music by George Shearing 1952 1954 Renewed 1980 1982 EMI LONGITUDE MUSIC All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per mission Michelle Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright 1965 Sony ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony ATV Music Publishing 8 Music Square West Nashville TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Mickey Mouse March from Walt Disney s THE MICKEY MOUSE CLUB Words and Music by Jimmie Dodd 1955 Walt Disney Music Company Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Mission Impossible Theme from the Paramount Television Series MISSION IMPOSSIBLE By Lalo Schifrin Copyright 1966 1967 Renewed 1994 1995 by Bruin Music Com pany International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Mona Lisa from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY U S A Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans Copyright 1949 Renewed 1976 by Famous Music Corporation
206. ed Settings The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in the display see page 110 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION C STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING gt TAB lt 4 STYLE SETTING CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 109 N Q gt E A o E o jon E e O O lt e 5 ka o E S D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob c lt 7 Style Playback related Settings Data that is recorded when recording a Song Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data will be recorded when set to STYLE and only the chord data will be recorded when set to OFF or FIXED 110 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 2 Use the 1 A V 8 A V buttons for each setting STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING STOP ACMP FIXED OTS LINK TIMING REAL TIME SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW OFF STYLE TOUCH OFF SECTION SET OFF TEMPO RESET STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR PART ON OFF RESET STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR SYNCHRO STOP OTSLINK STOP STYLE RT ACMP TIMING WINDOW TOUCH SECTION SET TEMPO ON OFF lt ee e lt Ve Stop Accompaniment When ACMP ON OFF is turned on and SYNC START is off you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboa
207. ed by law to return the defective parts However you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you Disposal Notice Should this product become damaged beyond repair or for some reason its useful life is consid ered to be at an end please observe all local state and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead batteries plastics etc NOTICE Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl edge relating to how a function or effect works when the unit is operating as designed are not covered by the man ufacturer s warranty and are therefore the owners respon sibility Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service NAME PLATE LOCATION The graphic below indi cates the location of the name plate The model number serial number power requirements etc are located on this plate You should record the model number serial number and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase Model Serial No Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include bu
208. ed to CD When you play back that CD on your audio system you can hear the actual piano performance The piano itself is not neces sary since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano and your speakers reproduce them Recording and play back the performance of a digital instrument MIDI data Recording Playback ae A Tone Generator Sequencer USB storage A device USB storage device 2 NOTE In the case of digital instruments the audio signals are sent through output jacks such as AUX OUT on the instrument The controller and tone generator in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic exam ple Here the player s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data see illustration below In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano special recording equipment is needed How ever since the instrument features a built in sequencer that lets you record performance data this recording equipment is unnecessary Instead your digital instru ment the Clavinova allows you to both record and play back the data Tone generator Sequencer mumn mmum Keyboard performance MIDI data However we also need a sound source to produce the audio which eventually comes from your speakers The tone generator of the instrument fills this function The re
209. edal or footswitch For details on how to best play each voice call up the Information window pressing the 7 A button in the Voice Selection display MegaVoice The MegaVoices are not intended to be played from the keyboard They are primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data such as songs and styles Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular have been cre ated as MegaVoices What makes MegaVoices special is their use of velocity switching Normal Voices use velocity switching too to make the sound quality and or level of a Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it This makes the instrument s Voices sound authentic and natural However with MegaVoices each velocity range the measure of your playing strength has a completely different sound For example a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various performance techniques In conventional instruments different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect However now with MegaVoices a convincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice using specific velocity values to play the desired sounds Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to play the sounds they re not intended for playing from the keyboard They are however very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data especially when you want to avoid using several di
210. edals installed to the instrument Right Center and Left pedals can also be assigned to various func tions here The following explanations cover the related operations and assignable functions parameters Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt D CONTROLLER gt TAB lt 4 PEDAL Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller AUX PEDAL jack 2 Use the A B buttons to select one of the three pedals or the AUX connected pedal to which the function is to be assigned 3 Use the 1 A W button to select the functions to be assigned to the pedal specified in step 2 Details on the pedal functions are listed below A Use the 2A W 8 A V buttons to set the details of the selected functions The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3 Details on the parameters are given below 5 Check that the desired function is controllable with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal DTIH When you use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings page 134 these settings are invalid Set the polarity of the pedal Pedal on off operation may differ depending on the partic ular pedal you ve connected to the instrument For exam ple pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on while pressing a different make brand of pedal may turn the function off If necessary use this set ting to reverse the control Press the I AUX PEDAL POLARITY button to switch the pola
211. eesseeees 112 Creating a Set of Favorite Records s s s 114 Editing Records sisscessisieseasaia deesvascessnssecieasieacnaccain 114 Saving the RECOM EE 115 Style Creator wicicisscsisscsccsissscsccsssscsscssaceevensens 117 Style StrUCtUNe c cccsisscssevevsaccnerscesennstueessasecoaseaedae 117 Creating a Style safraan 118 Editing the Created Style oe eeeeeeeeesereeeees 123 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory 131 Registering and Saving Custom Panel KT 131 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups 132 Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup Naming a Raeren 133 Disabling Recall of Specific Items Freeze FUNCTION seeeececcccceeessseeceeeseseeneeeeees 133 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order Registration SEQUENCE eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 134 Using Creating and Editing e LN ET Compatible Song Types EEN 136 Operations for Song Playback enke 137 Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination etc MIXING CONSOLE 140 Using the Practice Function Guide 141 Selecting the Guide Function Type eeeeee 141 Recording Your Performance en 143 Recording Methods secceessseeeceesneeeeeeneeeeees 143 Editing a Recorded SONG eessseeeeesteeeeeeneeeeees 158 Using a Microphone 000066 167 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters 167 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony SOUNA ET 1
212. elect the desired record by using the following four search categories To select a record press the 2 A W 3 A V buttons BE e You can also select the desired record by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER button to execute e Searching the records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria page 112 es MUSIC Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record letting you easily find the desired music style DEITA Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically When sorting records by song title use the 1 A W button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically Simultaneously press the A W buttons to move the cursor to the first record STYL Ennes This is the preset Style assigned to the record BEX Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically When sorting records by Style name use the HA W 5 A W button to skip up or down through the Styles alphabetically Simultaneously press the A W buttons to move the cursor to the first record BEAT This is the time signature registered to each Record e TEMPO This is the assigned tempo setting for the record 52 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 4 Play the keyboard Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected
213. en set to ON the microphone sound is turned off e VOLUME Adjusts the output volume of the microphone sound CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 173 auoydossiw e BuIsN Talk Setting Talk Setting This function lets you have special settings for making announcements between songs separate from the settings for your singing performance 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt G MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY 2 Press the I MIC SETTING button to call up the MICROPHONE SET TING display TALK OFF A 1 MIC EFFECT OFF F VOCAL HARMONY ON B G VOCAL HARMONY S TYPE H D MIC SETTING 0 000 TALK MIC EFFECT VOCAL HARMONY v v ka a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Le 3 alt N L LJ C LJ 3 Press the TAB gt button to select the TALK SETTING tab display MICROPHONE SETTING TAB OVERALL SETTING TALK SETTING VOLUME 85 a REVERB DEFI CHORUS DEPTH 0 i 4 TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR 0dB B CT TYPE EQ TEL DEPTH 127 e c H D i REVERB CHORUS TOTAL VOLUME E DEPTH DEPTH ATTENUATOR B o e S Qa Q 2 ao oD c w A Use the A B buttons to select the item parameter page 175 to be set nn Use the 1 A W 7 A V butt
214. en using the Multi Assign effect The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play Echo Types When one of the Echo Types is selected the corresponding effect echo tremolo trill is applied to the note played in the right hand section of the keyboard in time with the cur rently set tempo regardless of the ACMP ON OFF and the LEFT part on off status Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously last two notes if more than two notes are held and it plays those notes alternately Harmony Echo Settings VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of Multi Assign It determines the level of the harmony echo notes generated by the Harmony Echo effect SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo Tremolo or Trill is selected in Type above It determines the speed of the Echo Tremolo and Trill effects ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of Multi Assign This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony echo notes will be sounded CHORD This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected When this is set to NOTE ON the Harmony effect is applied only to the note played in the right hand section of ONLY the keyboard that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard TOUCH This parameter is availab
215. erwise the instrument TV or radio may generate noise e Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over e Before moving the instrument remove all connected cables e When setting up the product make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible If some trouble or malfunction occurs immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet Even when the power switch is turned off electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level When you are not using the product for a long time make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet 1 B 11 1 2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual wo e Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power for all components Before turning the power on or off for all components set all volume levels to minimum Also be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level e In the case of a model with a polished finish gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument s finish e When cleaning the instrument use a soft dry or slightly damp cloth Do not use paint thinners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated wiping cloths Handling caution e Take ca
216. es and changes as well as special riffs with chord changes with the Main sections These have been programmed to add spice and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres Keep in mind however that the Styles may not necessarily be appropriate or even harmonically correct for all songs and for all chord playing In some cases for example playing a simple major triad for a country song may result in a jazzy seventh chord or playing an on bass chord may result in inappropriate or unex pected accompaniment Pianist These special Styles provide piano only accompaniment Just by play ing the proper chords with your left hand you can automatically add complicated professional sounding arpeggios and bass chord patterns Selecting a Chord Fingering Type Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard There are seven types of fingerings s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Bunea Suen Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt C STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING gt TAB gt CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the 1 A W 3 A V buttons to select a fingering STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING FINGERING CHORD TUTOR FINGERED MULTI FINGER Both Single Finger and o A 3 Fingered are possible For CHORD NAME C d e Finger press the white black key s closest to the root note
217. essed after selecting a Style you can call up the custom panel settings for voices and tempos etc designed to best match the selected Style To return to the previous display press the EXIT button e You can instantly jump back to the original display by double clicking on one of the A J buttons i 3 Press the ACMP ON OFF button to turn on Auto Accompaniment Use the left hand section lower part of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment ACMP SYNC ON OFF Sule ENDING tit E o o 5 6 A Press the SYNC START button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing 5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the Auto Accompaniment starts Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand BOG Chord Fingerings There are seven different fingering methods you can use to specify chords page 107 6 Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing the ENDING button at the point in the score page 45 indicated by Ending When Ending playback is finished the Style automatically stops BEd About the various Styles Refer to the Style List in the separate Data List booklet e Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance Tap function The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the TAP TEMPO button twice at the desired tempo e Specifying the spl
218. even when changing the Registration Mem ory setting e The Left Part On Off setting is included in the Style group Remove the checkmark from STYLE in the Freeze setting display page 133 Even though a Registration Memory setting contain ing a User USB voice is selected the File Selection dis play shows a Preset Voice e This is normal even with the Preset Voice shown the actual sounding Voice is the selected User USB Voice When a User USB Voice is saved to the User USB drive the actual data is divided into two separate types 1 the source Preset Voice itself and 2 the parameter settings as set in the Voice Set When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a User USB Voice the instru ment selects the Preset voice on which the User USB Voice is based then applies the relevant parameter set tings to it so that your original User USB Voice is sounded Songs cannot be selected e This may be because the language settings have been changed Set the appropriate language for the Song file name e If the size of the Song data is large about 300 KB or greater the Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be read by the instrument Song playback does not start e New Song a blank Song has been selected Make sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection display page 35 e Make sure to press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button The Song has been stopped at the end of the
219. ey signature as well as the major minor set ting for the music score shown on the display XGPrm XG Parameters Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parame ters Refer to the MIDI Data Format in the separate Data List booklet for details SysEx System exclusive Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here however you can delete cut copy and paste the data Meta Meta Event Displays the SMF meta events in the Song Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here however you can delete cut copy and paste the data Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 Recording Your Performance A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 165 s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter Recording Your Performance Editing Lyrics LYRICS The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 158 From this display you can edit the recorded Lyrics events The operations here are basically the same as in the section Editing Note or Chord Events on page 163 Lyrics
220. fect Use the 3 A W 6 A Y buttons to select the destination for saving the effect The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block MIXING CONSOLE L VOICE V FILTER Y TUNE EFFECT BLOCK DSP6 OFF CATEGORY DELAY TYPE TEMPO DELAY MEMORY EIS 1 2 ea a LJ LJ 7 8 14 Press the I SAVE button to save the effect page 69 When recalling the saved effect use the same procedure as in step 8 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE EQ Equalizer Equalizer also called EQ is a sound processor that divides the frequency spec trum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speak ers to match the special character of the room For example you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too boomy or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively dead and free of echoes The instrument possesses a high grade five band digital EQ With this function a final effect tone control can be added to the output of your instrument You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in the EQ display You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the fr
221. fferent Voices just for a single instrument part Live These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo to produce a truly authentic rich sound full of atmosphere and ambience Cool These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisti cated programming Sweet These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha s sophisticated technology and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural you ll swear you re playing the real thing Live Drums These are high quality drum sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic Sampling Live SFX These are high quality Latin percussion sounds taking full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic sampling They give you a broader and more versatile range of Latin percussion than the normal drum Voices Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys letting you play the sounds from the keyboard SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys letting you play the sounds from the keyboard Organ Flutes This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Voice Set to adjust the various foot ages and craft your own original organ sounds See page 103 for details Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Different Voices Simulta neously The instrument keyboard features vari
222. for Network Time Protocol a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network For this instrument the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time date for cookies and SSL Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services In order to connect to the Internet it is necessary to contract to a provider Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing informa tion on the Internet It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself If not it forwards the request to the real server Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed and to filter requests usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks For example a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office and allow them to all access the Internet and share data A router is usually con nected between a modem and a computer although some modems have a built in router Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network providing access to files and services Site Short for website this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together For example the collec tion of web pages whose addresses begin with http www yamaha com is referred to as
223. g Unlike an acoustic piano the instrument does not need to be tuned It always stays perfectly in tune Transporting If you move to another location you can transport the instrument along with other belongings You can move the unit as it is assembled or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of the box Transport the keyboard horizontally Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock When transporting the assembled instrument make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Table of Contents Introduction Enhanced Realism and Natural EXPrESSIVeENESS jis casssssesssoctcccdedsdeseisedecdervecvenesens 10 Panel Controls zrnin enesis 12 Playing the Keyboard sesssssessesseeseessresesesese 14 Setting UD E 16 MUSIC REST c0c c 0cavssedeevivascasvavenctevavseessnenncsness 16 WE 16 Using Headphones sssr 17 Changing the Display Language 18 Display Settings i vescvcesssusvesastssrevessscnedesesseee 18 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and FIOPPY DISKS decsessssssisssscsesesesooescsvecsessenssatesexaxees 21 Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc enen 22 Quick Guide Playing the Demos eee eee eee eee eee 23 Operations in the Basic Displays 25 Operationr
224. g cable connectors Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction Explanations on the USB TO HOST terminal can be found in the previous section Using USB Storage Devices This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB storage device and allows you to save data you ve cre ated to the connected device as well as read data from the connected device The following description gener ally explains about how to connect and use them Before using a USB storage device be sure to read Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Mem ory Floppy Disk etc on page 22 Connect the USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal with a standard USB cable 2 After that exit once from the selection display then return to the display or press the Tab switch buttons lt and gt simultaneously from the selection display The USB tabs USB 1 USB 2 etc are automatically called up allowing you to save files and play back music data from the devices Connecting a Computer or USB Device 2 NOTE Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device You can check this in the display called up by the following oper ation FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt MEDIA Select the device by using the A B buttons in this display and press F PROPERTY L NOTE Even with a computer connected to the USB TO HOST terminal and a USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE ter
225. gs are shown for the selected template Here you can edit each parame ter MIDI SONG STYLE LEFT RI R2 eile ie le e 1 LOCAL CONTROL CLOCK INTERNAL RECEIVE TRANSPOSE OFF SYS EX CHORD SYS EX gt TRANSMIT CLOCK OFF START STOP SONG Tx ON Tx ON Di EI Rx ON Rx ON MESSAGE SW SONG STYLE LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT2 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual A Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up the rele vant setting display SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings page 202 TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmission Settings page 202 RECEIVE display MIDI Reception Settings page 203 BASS display Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI recep tion data page 203 CHORD DETECT display Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data page 204 5 When you ve finished editing press the EXIT button to return to the MIDI template selection display PRESET or USER 6 Select the USER tab display to save the data by using the TAB lt gt buttons page 69 MIDI Settings Pre Programmed MIDI Templates MIDI PRESET EI vum Accord _ kpp amp sryLe lMmDI Accora2 _ l Master KBD _ muprPedat song L vm redaz B clock Ext vm orr Template name Description All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts
226. guration is displayed at the upper left side box in the display Effect Return Level Determines the level or amount of effect applied This is set for all parts or chan nels CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 10 11 12 13 14 13 If you have selected one of the DSP 2 5 effect blocks in step 5 You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter To select the standard type of parameters press the B button To select its variation parameter press the E button MIXING CONSOLE FILTER TUNE EFFECT BLOCK DSP6 OFF A CATEGORY DELAY F TYPE TEMPO DELAY PARAMETER VALUE G DELAY TIME S c C F B LEVEL 16 H O j FB HIGH DUMP 1 0 naa 5 CO L R DIFFUSION 14ms 3 LAG 0ms DRY WET E D25 gt W C EQ LOW FREQ 500Hz Ld EQ LOW GAIN 0dB EQ HIGH FREQ 4 0kHz CATE BLOCK GORY TYPE PARAMETER VALUE e JI Ka Ka Ka el De gt Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the 4A W 5 A V buttons Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the 6 A W 7 A V buttons If you have selected the REVERB CHORUS or DSP1 effect block in step 5 Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing 8 A W button Press the I SAVE button to call up the display for saving your origi nal ef
227. h Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA FCC DoC CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT FULLY INSERT ATTENTION POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELEC TRIQUES INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU AU FOND polarity This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd Ceci ne s applique qu aux produits distribu s par Yamaha Canada Musique Lt e This product contains a high intensity lamp that con tains a small amount of mercury Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal information in the United States refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site www eiae org This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA mercury For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser 4 Yamaha ou au distributeur
228. ha website http music yamaha com homekeyboard Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connect ing the instrument since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself To use the Internet connection you will first need to subscribe to an Internet ser vice or provider Connection example 1 Connecting by cable using a modem without router Modem Router LAN cable No router capability Cable type LAN cable LAN port Here modem refers to an ADSL modem optical network unit ONU or cable modem Connection example 2 Connecting by cable using a modem with router LAN cable ADSL modem Router capability LAN cable LAN port Modem A A recess pint Wireless Game Adaptor Sai 1 TT Here modem refers to an ADSL modem optical network unit ONU or cable modem Accessing the Special Website From the special website you can audition and purchase Song data among other things To access the site press the INTERNET button while the instrument is connected to the Internet MAIN TRANSPOSE J 103 Dem Natural C GrandPianol C D 4 4 d 103 STYLE Cy Classic8Beat Oe abana ERC INTERNET SONG STYLE MI
229. he specifications of the devices and particular data recording meth ods GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation for mats Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1 as is most commercially available software GM System Level 2 GM System Level 2 is a standard specification that enhances the original GM System Level 1 and improves Song data compatibility It provides for increased polyphony greater voice selection expanded voice parameters and integrated effect processing XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future Song data recorded on the CGP 1000 using Voices in the XG category is XG compatible DOC Disk Orchestra Collection This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the Clavinova series instruments GS GS was developed by the Roland Corporation In the same way as Yamaha XG GS is a major enhance ment of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations as well as greater expres sive control over Voices and effects CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 199 SODIAV JAYIO YUM JUatUNAsU INOA SUIS Kai EU D gt ov Q i Q Ss zi O E 3 D i E o
230. he Song last selected before turning off the power is contained in USB storage device you ll need to reinsert reconnect the same USB storage device to call up the Song again The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display shown by pressing the REW FF buttons e This happens when playing back music data for which a specific fixed tempo is set In the AB Repeat function the B point cannot be set e The A point has not been set Set the B point only after setting the A point When playing back a Song some channels do not play e Playback of these channels may be set to OFF Turn playback on for those channels that are set to OFF page 143 A Song to which write protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name cannot be moved to external media such as a SmartMedia card or floppy disk e A Song to which write protect has been applied cannot be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia floppy disk etc Use the USB TO DEVICE terminal to move the song to a USB flash memory device connected to this instrument The Tuning Curve of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instruments Voices e The Tuning Curve designed especially for piano Voices may not sound with the appropriate pitches when used with other instrument Voices Set the Tuning Curve to FLAT page 100 The melody still plays back even when spec
231. he style playback is also stopped at the same time e Tempo for playing back a Song and a style at the same time When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used Playing Songs with the Quick Start function With the default settings the Quick Start function is turned on On some commercially available Song data certain settings related to the Song such as voice selection volume etc are recorded to the first measure before the actual note data When Quick Start is set to ON the instru ment reads all initial non note data of the Song at the highest possible speed then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible with a mini mum pause for reading of data When Quick Start is set to ON a Song is played back directly from the first note which may be in the middle of a measure If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has silence prior to the first note turn Quick Start OFF 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt B SONG SETTING 2 Press the 7 Y QUICK START button to turn the Quick Start OFF Operations for Song Playback Parameter Lock You can lock specific parame ters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 132 If the Song data does not contain this data the current
232. he top position of the Song as the Setup data The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts E Setup recording procedure 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU A SONG CREATOR TAB lt 4 PB CHANNEL gt B SET UP 2 Use the 1A W 7A W buttons to determine the settings to be automatically called up when the Song starts SONG Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts RIGHT1 2 and LEFT and their on off status Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting This can be recorded at any point in a Song the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the top position of the Song SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON OFF setting LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display MIC SETTING Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings in the Mixing Console display page 88 3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the 8 A button A Press the D EXECUTE button to execute the SETUP recording oper ation 5 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the d
233. hen this is set to ON you can use the sostenuto pedal to control the punch in and punch out points While a Song is playing back pressing and holding the sostenuto pedal instantly enables Punch In recording while releasing the pedal stops recording Punch Out You can press and release the sostenuto pedal as often as you want during playback to punch in out of overwrite recording Note that the current function assignment of the sostenuto pedal is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In Out function is set to ON L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe bd DD Le oO L O ob Z D D Editing Channel Events CHANNEL The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 158 1 Use the A B buttons to select the Edit menu page 161 2 Use the 1A W 8 A W buttons to edit the data For information on the available parameters see page 161 3 Press the D EXECUTE button to execute the operation for the cur rent display After the operation with the exception of the SETUP menu display is com pleted this button changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the Operation results The Undo function only has one level only the immediate operation can be undone 160 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 4 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in th
234. her alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker s may be capable of pro ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist IMPORTANT The louder the sound the shorter the time period before damage occurs 15 e Some Yamaha products may have benches and or acces sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures where applica ble are well secured BEFORE using Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only No other uses are recom mended PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92 469 2 FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instruc tions contained in this manual meets FCC require ments Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to acces sories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Fail ure to follow instructions cou
235. highest harmony notes HARMONY 1 2 3 PAN Specifies the stereo pan position of the first lowest second and third highest harmony notes Random The stereo position of the sound will change randomly when ever the keyboard is played This is effective when the Har mony mode page 173 is set to VOCODER or CHORDAL L63 gt R C L lt R63 A setting of L63 gt R pans the sound hard left while C is at cen ter and L lt R63 is at hard right HARMONY1 2 3 DETUNE Detunes the first lowest second and third highest harmony notes by the specified number of cents PITCH TO NOTE When this is set to ON you can play the voices of the instru ment with your voice The instrument tracks the pitch of your voice and converts it to note data for the tone generator Keep in mind however that dynamic changes in your voice do not affect the volume of the tone generator PITCH TO NOTE PART Determines which of the instrument parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is ON Adjusting the Microphone and Har mony Sound 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt G MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY 2 Press the I MIC SETTING button to call up the MICROPHONE SET TING display MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK OFF vo A 1 MIC EFFECT OFF F 5 VOCAL HARMONY ON
236. i V op T Wi E Gi ke E o Sp C g Ed Sp D Gi Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Registration Memory data compatibility In general Registration Memory data Bank files is compatible among the models CGP 1000 CVP 409 407 405 403 401 However the data may not be perfectly compatible depending on the specifications of each model About recalling setups from a USB storage device When recalling the setups includ ing Song Style file selection from a USB storage device make sure that the appropriate USB storage device including the registered Song Style is connected into the USB TO DEVICE Terminal Saving the Registered Panel Setups You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file 4 Bank 4 a Bank 3 a Bank 1 UUUUUUUU Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY REGIST BANK but tons to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display 2 Press the 6 W button to save the Bank file page 69 DELETE FOLDER Gi COPY PAST REGIST BANK gt Ge z Ge 2 gt C sl gt B sl gt vi gt 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY REGIST BANK but tons to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display REGIST BANK
237. ic Finder records you ve saved to USER USB follow the instructions below 1 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display MUSIC FINDER TAB lt 4 gt ALL 2 Press the 7 A W FILES button to open the File selection display of the Music Finder Use the TAB lt gt buttons to select USER USB 4 Press the A J buttons to select the desired Music Finder file The message is displayed according to the content of the file when the file Wi CAUTION i A i is chosen and the desired button is pressed e Selecting REPLACE auto matically deletes all your e REPLACE original records from inter nal memory and replaces them with the factory Music All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file Finder data e APPEND e Make sure that all impor tant data hasbeen ead The records called up are added to another location before Execute the operation to call up the Music Finder file Select CANCEL hand when the file to delete all records of the to abort this operation Music Finder is down MUSIC FINDER loaded from the web page 117 and executed STYLE BEAT TEMPO i ig Ci 40 sBigBand 4 4 SORT BY 69 Summers Long PowerRock sia A Bridge To Cross Troubled PowerBallad ara SORT ORDER A Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 4 4 Restoring the Music Finder A Cosy Life In
238. ie eege dE CHORD FINGERING Chord Tutor function E EE COMMON CONFIG 1 CONFIG 2 COMMAS EE CONTROLLER cose canes sencestexertieseacines EE ENEE COO sissssieccetendess Damper Pedal esusu isinisisi ia BIO DEE DEMO oireina Demo Voice Direct Access DOC Disk Orchestra Collection Drums DSP engkeier DSP DSP VARIATION deer eggede dee gies age stan sancdenertanes EIB EE DYNAMIC DAMPER Effect cccccccccssscscscsceeceeeeeeeseseeees 216 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Edit Bookmarks 4 Edit EMCGD gedeien Dee dE ES EE ge as Edit Lyrics ve Edit Master COMmpressOr e ceceeseeeeeeeetseeeneteseeeeeneees 98 Edit MUSIC Finder deed dE 114 Edit Style x Edit V cal Harmony kessar cinn in coeee 167 Gelee EE EFFEC Z us dgesuee serie Effect microphone Effect Voice eesse Effect Return Level Effect E EFFECT EQ 2 2eezggege i Entering characters Entering Characters Internet Direct Connection 178 GE EE RE EQUAL TEMPERAMENT ESEQ EXIT FaCtOry Keser ss sccsscsssccssscesessesssessessssncesssccivensetsessnczeuserts 74 Factory programmed Settings ceeeeseeeeseesseeseeeeees 74 FADE IN OUT Song ze Fade In Out Dpme siseses FADE IN OUT AHOED TIME E Fast forward vevcesssscscoetiecnescosaseets Favorite File seu d geeEeeede Eeer File Selection Display File Selection Display Basic Operation ccceeeeee 67 File Selection Display Configura
239. ifying Track 1 as the part to be muted for one handed practice e A part other than the melody part has been assigned to Track 1 Reassign the channel containing the melody to Track 1 page 142 The Guide lamps do not light during Song playback even after pressing the GUIDE button e Make sure to turn on the Guide lamps page 141 e Any notes outside of the 88 key range cannot be indi cated by the Guide lamps The Guide lamps light an octave or two lower higher than the actual pitch e The Guide lamps sometimes light an octave or two lower higher than the actual pitch depending on the selected Voice 208 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual The lamps in the chord section of the keyboard light e The Guide function for chords page 50 has been enabled Turn the Style off by pressing the ACMP ON OFF button The Guide lamps do not indicate how to play chords e Make sure that the Guide Mode is set to FollowLights page 108 e You cannot check how to play chords with the Guide lamps if the chord fingering method is set to Single Fin ger Full Keyboard or Al Full Keyboard Select another fingering method page 108 When displaying the music score long notes that have been entered such as whole notes and ties are not displayed correctly e Long notes such as whole notes and ties may not be shown in the music score display exactly as they were entered Selecting Tenuto by pressing the
240. igher the value of Q the narrower the band width e FREQ center frequency Use the 2 A W button The available FREQ range is different for each band Using Creating and Editing Voices CO 9 Press the H or I STORE 1 or 2 button to save the edited EQ type page 69 Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved When recalling the saved EQ type use the same procedure as in step 6 96 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Master Compressor Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics soft ness loudness of an audio signal For signals that vary widely in dynamics such as vocals and guitar parts it squeezes the dynamic range effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer When used with gain to boost the overall level this creates a more powerful more consistently high level sound Compres sion can be used to increase sustain for electric guitar smooth out the volume of a vocal or bring a drum kit or rhythm pattern further up front in the mix The instru ment has a sophisticated multi band compressor that allows you to adjust the com pression effect for individual frequency bands giving you detailed sonic control You can edit and save your own custom Compressor types or conveniently select from one of the presets E Selecting a Master Compressor type 1 3 Same operation as in the Basic Procedure on page 88 In s
241. iles are output via VIDEO OUT RGB OUT regardless of the display that is called up on the instrument e Avoid looking at the television video or computer monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller AUX PEDAL jack By connecting a Foot Controller or Footswitch to the AUX PEDAL jack you can have convenient control over various user assignable functions For example connecting the Foot controller FC7 and assigning it the volume control function allows you to add expression to your performance by controlling the volume level of the notes you play Or by connecting the FC4 or FC5 footswitch and assigning it to the Style playback start stop function you can start and stop the Style with your foot In this case the pedal has the same function as the panel STYLE CONTROL START STOP button The assignable functions are listed following the instructions below AUX PEDAL Foot Pedals X Foot Controller FC7 optional Footswitch FC5 optional Footswitch FC4 optional CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is off Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal CONTROLLER AUX PEDAL POLARITY LEET RIGHTI RIGHT2 In addition to the footswitch or foot controller the three piano p
242. ing QUICK START rsrsrsr teava R RANDOM a scscucsisiavsesdubessiadtanetbebeshancetetetoesaustastantaanetis Realtime Recording REC sissccesessssseudssdecveasetecnsvzs REC MODE RECEIVE iseseitsnctiesiaaisstbuscandianwes EEEE R SENEN E RECO RT E Record Style REGISTRATION MEMORY AA 131 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE scssiscoiescanes cones scueestesscaneess 134 REPEAT MODE eeben ia edu Age Repeat Playback tte eege deed Repeat Playback Function Kee cssccutivevtecteceseusis A E i REVOICE cisssssscessacesessssssstacesssasssseacesssesvessssevesstassasesessions REWIIG sts sccesc Soeveves ness are iesse eeben eegener 78 KE Save Music Finder SCALE TUNE ctucecieeseveseane EE Search Music Finder Records o n 112 Section Set SESSION EE Set the polarity of the pedal DEX E SIINGLEJFIINGER sicvecseciessitgepasssaccedeevsssencascezteass teatansstes SMF Standard MIDI file SONP Aen eege SONG gie EE EE Song channel Sostenuto Pedal 00 BOUNEN SOUNGCNCCIS ENE E T ET SPATIAL ENSEMBLE Effect Speaker setting SPENT tegen SPLIT POINT Step Recording St p ACMP ss ssscsssicsscacesiessasssssdesasavacassosecevsseeassassasaoneass SEak en Style Assembly Sile Change BENaVION sssi isisi rcas KEE SME FIE atare ereet ee ededsdecerunvatsndscteuseeesetaseens STYLE PART Style Dee einna e AIEEE STYLE SETTING SPEIT POINT casccssstissacsseansdecesebecareiass 109 Style Structure Style Touch SWEET zeg gebe
243. ing destination when multiple USB storage devices are connected To check the number of the USB storage device USB1 and USB2 etc press the A B F button on the display of step 4 and change the tab Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display grrr 6 Start recording by pressing the J REC button then start your performance When recording begins the RECORDING indication on the display changes to red and the elapsed recording time is displayed N CAUTION Avoid frequently connecting disconnecting the USB storage device or turning the power on off too often Doing so may corrupt the USB storage device data or the recording data gegen 7 Stop recording by pressing the J STOP button p g 9y Pp g The file name is automatically named and is always given a new unique name and a message indicating the file name is displayed BIT The recording operation continues even if you close the Recording display by pushing the EXIT button To stop the recording press the J STOP button on the Recording display CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 61 62 WW ee Os ee 2 P Playing Back the Recorded Performance Play back the recorded performance 1 Call up the USB AUDIO RECORDER display USB E USB AUDIO RECORDER 2 Press the 7 A W 8 A V AUDITION button to display the audio files WAV data saved to the connected USB storage device The file recorded is selected in step 1
244. ion CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 3 S e Q Q a e bal 21 Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc This instrument features a built in USB TO DEVICE termi nal By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable you can save data you ve cre ated to the connected device as well as read data from the connected device Be sure to handle USB storage device with care Follow the important precautions below 2 NOTE For more information about the handling of USB storage device refer to the owner s manual of the USB storage device Using USB Storage Devices e When connecting a USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc tion Before removing the media from the device make sure that the instrument is not accessing data such as in the Save Copy and Delete operations Ab CAUTION e Avoid frequently turning the power on off to the USB storage device or connecting disconnecting the cable too often Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument freezing or hanging up While the instru ment is accessing data such as in the Save Copy and Delete operations do NOT unplug the USB cable do NOT remove the media from the device and do NOT turn the power off to either device Doing so may cor rupt the data on either or both devices
245. ired sig nal vocal etc to pass e SW Switch This turns the Noise Gate on or off e TH Threshold This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open Ah CAUTION Settings in the OVERALL SET TING tab display are automat ically saved to the instrument when you exit from the dis play However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings will be lost CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 171 auoydossiw e suis Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound E COMPRESSOR This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics It effectively compresses the signal making soft parts louder and loud parts softer e SW Switch This turns the Compressor on or off e TH Threshold This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied e RATIO This adjusts the compression ratio e OUT This adjusts the final output level E VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled e VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect in Vocoder mode page 173 is controlled by note data the notes you play on the keyboard and or the notes of the song data This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony SONG CHANNEL MUTE PLAY When set to MUTE the channel selected bel
246. isk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media then connecting inserting the media to the instrument Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files and Style File formatted Style files cre ated on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer Once you ve copied the data connect the device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal of the instrument and play back the data on the instrument Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device LI aa S USB storage device Computer Instrument UU Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument CH cl es SS USB storage device Computer USB TO DEVICE terminal Instrument UU Connect to the Internet LAN Port There are three ways to use the LAN port located on the bottom left of the instrument to access special Inter net websites and download song data etc See page 176 for instructions on connecting 196 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual What is MIDI Put simply MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows easy and comprehensi
247. istration Sequence Appears when the Registration Sequence is active page 134 Returning to the Main display Here s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display Simply press the DIRECT ACCESS button then the EXIT button When you select the RIGHT 1 part lt appears at the right of the Voice name When you select the RIGHT 2 part lt appears at the right of the Voice name When you select the LEFT part gt appears at the left of the Voice name CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 65 uoneisdo aiseg Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Operation The File Selection display appears when you press one of the buttons shown below From here you can select Voices Styles and other data VOICE category selection buttons VOICE CONTROL O PIANO QEPIANO O STRINGS O GAS O SAXOPHONE Cell O ORGAN SONG SELECT button pisia O TRUMPET O BRASS O ACCORDION O HU O SYNTHAFX O DRUM KIT O FLUTES EECH D Co C ei pz SH E CH EK SE o oo EPR o ek EE a i oot aoit ER tt e 90000 R O00 000 O te Lesser OF D goo DDDDDDDD crven gt STYLE category selection buttons asteak REGIST BANK selection buttons SELECT STYLE CONTROL OPOP amp ROC
248. it point the border between the right and left hand range See page 111 e Turns touch response on off for the Style playback Style Touch See page 110 46 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard page 40 This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard l Call up the Main display DIRECT ACCESS gt EXIT BEGG The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display If the Balance display is not selected press the EXIT button 2 To adjust the Style volume press the 2 A W button To adjust the keyboard RIGHT 1 volume press the 6 A V button Pattern Variation While you play you can automatically add specially created intros and endings as well as variations in the rhythm chord patterns for more dynamic professional sounding performances There are several different auto accompani ment pattern variations for each situation starting your performance during your performance and ending your per formance Try out the variations and combine them freely To Start Playing STYLE CONTROL KEN TRANSPOSE O POP amp ROCK BALLAD DANCE QOSWING amp JAZZOQ R amp B O COUNTRY O LATIN QBALLROOM O BEE O WORLD PIANIST JG RESET CHE AUTO SYNC SYNC START ON OFF FILL IN INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP MUSIC FINDER O O O ie O O ie O O O O
249. ki Drum Kit Le EE Ge SONG SELECT cccccccccececcscecececcscececeecsesceceecscsceceucscsceceecaveees 36 D WAL ARIGTAT 2 niren anainn Sostenuto pedal SE ENEE ENEE SPLIT LEFT ssiscastssisessinncsiassotessarosasensiesusssssspcesnesentiurarveduiacs e E EE Ce HE hd EE EEGENEN e ENDING rtt HIR ccvssteccccnssosansoesvnsssteesveseyevnevevs STYLE category selection button ENTER EE SYNC ST EE Li EXIT een SYNC STOP EE EXTRA TRACKS cscsssssssessssssesssssecssssessssvessssuscsssvesssseesessees ki T F D TAB AND E EEE EEE E 20 FUNCTION eene TAP TEMPO TEMPO cscsscsesseseesessesessesesssesteseseees TRACK 1 IR ki G TRACK 2 EE ki GUIDE os activa casststesiticevitidendaeaaaeseaaiet Scouse O U EE e EE USB TO DEVICE EEN 2 INTERNET nn UER a ee Pi INTERESSE eege et K et Se ae VOICE category selection buttons E Keyboard guide James ec VOICE EEFECTH scscecsconeacissescsescovssacsnonsstacsanasepsacauneucereatunn e oO L 2 E x lt ED CONT RAST cies eiedevtceccesncncaxconentecstinuscea turanehtincorties e Leftpedalesariaii rinena hion ari Eana 57 ILYRICS TEXT butonin nieres bi CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 219 The followings are the titles credits and copyright notices for fifty seven 57 of the songs pre installed in this instrument Alfie Theme from the Paramount Picture ALFIE Words by Hal David Music by Burt Bacharach Copyright 1966 Renewed 1994 by Famous
250. l BAL ANCE button page 40 STYLE PART A Style consists of eight separate channels Here you can adjust the level balance among these eight channels or parts These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel CHAN NEL ON OFF button to call up the STYLE display SONG CH 1 8 9 16 A Song consists of sixteen separate channels Here you can adjust the level balance among these sixteen channels or parts These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel CHANNEL ON OFF button to call up the SONG display About Parts See below Instantly setting all parts to the same value Once you ve selected a parame ter in step 4 you can instantly set the same value to all other parts To do this simultaneously hold down one of the A J but tons and use the 1 8 buttons or the DATA ENTRY dial Sad10A Supp pue Buea 2Zutsn CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 89 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Adjustable Items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE Dis plays The following explanations cover the available items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE displays VOL VOICE e The RHY2 channel in the SONG AUTO REVOICE STYLE PART display can only be assigned to Drumkit Voices VOICE and SFX kit Voices e When playing GM song data channel 10 in the SONG CH 9 16 page can only be used See page 91 Allow
251. l Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company Inc and Chrysalis Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved I Just Called To Say Love You Words and Music by Stevie Wonder 1984 JOBETE MUSIC CO INC and BLACK BULL MUSIC c o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per mission Left My Heart In San Francisco Words by Douglass Cross Music by George Cory 1954 Renewed 1982 COLGEMS EMI MUSIC INC All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per mission In The Mood By Joe Garland Copyright 1939 1960 Shapiro Bernstein amp Co Inc New York Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Isn t She Lovely Words and Music by Stevie Wonder 1976 JOBETE MUSIC CO INC and BLACK BULL MUSIC c o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per mission Let It Be Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright 1970 Sony ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony ATV Music Publishing 8 Music Square West Nashville TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Let s Twist Again Words by Kal Mann Music by Dave Appell and Kal Mann Copyright 1961 Kalmann Music Inc Copyright Renewed All Rights Controlled and Administered by Spirit Two Music Inc ASCAP International Copyright S
252. l up the CHANNEL ON OFF display When the STYLE tab is not selected press the CHANNEL ON OFF but ton again MIXING CONSOLE b 3 K E K N C ON e ON A 2 Press the 1 W 8 W buttons to turn the channels on or off To listen to only one instrument by itself hold down the appropriate but ton for the channel to set the channel to SOLO To cancel SOLO simply press the appropriate channel button again Playing the chords in free tempo without Style playback You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the Style by setting ACMP ON OFF to on and SYNC START to off For example if MULTI FINGER is selected page 108 you can perform with your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of the keyboard with your one finger Setting the fade in out time You can set the time of the fade in and fade out page 137 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB lt CONFIG 1 gt A FADE IN OUT s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Buea Suen HOLD TIME 2 Set the parameters by using the 3 A W 5 A V buttons FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in or go from minimum to maximum FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out or go from maximum to minimum FADE OUT HOLD Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade TIME out Style Playback relat
253. laying the keys according to a different fin gering mode and not the one currently selected Check the accompaniment mode and play the keys according to the selected mode page 108 Synchro Stop cannot be turned on e Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard or Al Full Keyboard or when Style On Off is set to off Make sure the fingering mode is set to something besides Full Keyboard or Al Full Keyboard and set Style On Off to on Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regard less of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard e This is normal if the fingering mode is set to Full Key board or Al Full Keyboard If either of these is selected chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard irrespective of the split point setting If desired select a different fingering mode page 108 When playing back one Style and selecting another the newly selected Style doesn t play at the proper Tempo e You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style playback This is because Song playback has priority The two ways shown below let you play back a Style and Song simulta neously e Set the Song to Synchro Start standby then start the Style Start the Style playback
254. ld void your FCC authori zation to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to com ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regula tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac tory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you
255. ldstrasse 94 8008 Ziirich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC SLOVAKIA HUNGARY SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria CEE Department Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp z 0 0 Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 868 07 57 CL 40 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragsh ndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsl ndern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo THE NETHERLANDS BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen M sica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S A The Music House 147 Skiathou Street 112 55 Athens Greece Tel 01 228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden
256. le for all types with the exception of Multi Assign It determines LIMIT the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound This allows you to selec tively apply the harmony by your playing strength letting you create harmony accents in the melody The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly above the set value wn o 2 5 gt DD C ke Lu Ki C Wd oD E T o g O ob T Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts and Song Style channels including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position pan of each Voice to set the opti mum balance and stereo image and lets you set how the effects are applied Basic Procedure Press the MIXING CONSOLE button to call up the MIXING CON SOLE display MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART VOL YOICE FILTER TUNE V EFFECT I I SONG AUTO REVO MIXING CONSOLE Al Pr L El 88 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual nn Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up the relevant setting display For information on the available parameters see the section Adjustable items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE displays on page 90 Press the MIXING CONSOLE button repeatedly to call up the
257. le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico D F M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Rua Joaquim Floriano 913 4 andar Itaim Bibi CEP 04534 013 Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL Tel 011 3704 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrae 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefe
258. ller client system s hard drive or other local storage device much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk For this instrument this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument Gateway A system which links different networks or systems and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet This phrase is also used to mean the front screen or top page of a website Internet A huge network made up of networks the Internet allows high speed data transfer among computers mobile phones and other devices IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network and indicating the device s location on the network LAN Short for Local Area Network this is a data transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location such as an office or home by means of a special cable Link Location information in other sentences and images etc that are under buttons and character strings on a web page When the place with the link is clicked the page selection jumps to the relevant link Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line and vice versa NTP Short
259. long with Song playback Playing Melodies along with Auto Accompaniment Style Playback iess scisscssisisrssssssssssserssssesesdoasiisatodsissssiasisstisssst page 44 Use the Style playback features to automatically produce full backing parts and accompaniment while you play melodies on top It s like having an expert ensemble playing behind you Select an accompaniment Style such as pop jazz Latin etc and let the instrument be your backing band STYLE CONTROL OPOPEROCK O BALLAD O DANCE OSWINGaJAzzO RAB O COUNTRY O Lem QBALLROOM O TANMENT O WORLD O PIANIST ACMP_ AUTO SYNC SYNC START ON OFF FILL IN INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP MUSIC FINDER a o o o ie o o o ie o o o o e o o 1 D m A B e D E 1 D m S S run Displaying and Playing along with the Music Score ssses0s page 59 While playing back a Song you can have the music score notation automati cally shown on the display an excep
260. lowest octave This setting is available only when the NTR param eter page 128 is set to Root Trans Example When the highest key is F Root changes m CM kb C3 E3 G3 Notes played COM eee FM C 3 F3 G 3 F3 A3 C4 F M F 2 A 2 C 3 8 Style Creator CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 129 s J 5 yu wruedwoy ony y Sun pue Bunea Suen N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt e 5 ka o E D ES CO De CO c S eto E Ka 5 oO L O ob E lt 7 Style Creator 130 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual E NOTE LIMIT This sets the note range highest and lowest notes for voices recorded to the style channels By judicious setting of this range you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible in other words that no notes outside the natural range are sounded e g high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range Example When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes m CM C M E FM Notes played sb E3 G3 C4 F3 G 3 C 4 F3 A3 C4 High Limit Low Limit E RTR Retrigger Rule These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes STOP The notes stop sounding PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord PITCH SHIFT TO The
261. lowing before turning the power to the instru ment off or unplugging the USB cable to from the instrument computer Quit any open application software on the computer Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song e While a USB device is connected to the instrument you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations When turning the power of the instrument off then on again or when alternately connecting dis connecting the USB cable L NOTE e The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made e When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub e For information on setting up your sequence software refer to the owner s manual of the relevant software e Connection by MIDI terminals There are two ways to connect the instrument via MIDI to a computer If you have a MIDI interface built into your computer connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the computer interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the instrument and connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface MIDI cable MIDI IN MIDI OUT Instrument terminal terminal gt p Q D III MIDI OUT MIDI IN uk terminal terminal gt Computer with MIDI i
262. ls are simulta neously set to ON the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above MIDI USB1 M3 USB2 sao o 12935 4 567 8 9 10111213141516 ALL OFF EE ee MIDI USB1 USB2 CHANNEL Ee a e e a a a a Displaying the Voice Program Change Number Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice selection display This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB LSB val ues and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device You can set this in the display called up by the following operations FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt COMFIG 2 Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu ON and OFF UTILITY SPEAKER HEADPHONE SWITCH VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS OPEN amp SELECT DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER OFF DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO ON POPUP DISPLAY TIME 3 0sec SPEAKER L NOTE e The numbers displayed here start from 1 Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower since that number system starts from 0 e For the GS Voices this feature is not available the program change numbers are not shown CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Troubleshooting The instrument does
263. luding the user effect types user master EQ types user master compressor types and user vocal harmony types created via the Mixing Console displays are managed as a single file MUSIC FINDER All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single file A Select one of the tabs other than the PRESET by pressing the TAB lt gt buttons Note that the file in the PRESET tab display is the file of factory programmed settings If you select it the factory programmed settings for the respective item will be restored This is the same results as on page 74 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Independently by Item nn Save your file page 69 6 To recall your file select the tab and page to which you ve saved the file same tab and page as specified in step 4 and press the corre sponding A J button Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to a USB storage device This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged Data that can be saved 1 Song Style Registration Memory Bank and Voice 2 Music Finder Record Effect MIDI Template and System File Protected Songs those with a Prot 1 Prot 2 indication at the upper left of the file name cannot be saved However Songs with a Prot 2 indication can be moved cut and paste operation to a USB flash memory Effect data includes
264. m Natrat eg tural saved by pressing the USB a GrandPiane2 oct Piano USER buttons BrightPiano S Oct Piano2 USB USER A SONG B Natural F lg amp S Articulationt STYLE F VOICE gt Al J MellowPiano Harpsichord E RockPiano ISS Sale a DATA ENTRY ENTER 3 Select the tab containing the desired file by using the TAB lt gt buttons uoneisdo aiseg 2 Select the page containing the desired file by using the 1 A 7 A buttons 1 A 5 A buttons for Voice 1 A 6 A buttons for Song and Style 3 Select the file There are two ways to do so e Press one of the A J buttons e Select the file by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER button to execute A Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level folder To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder press the 8 A UP button Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display The PRESET Voice files are categorized and contained in appropriate folders VOICE RICHTL This display shows the Voice files a D in a folder EZ GrandPiano2 S 4 Natural i P BrightPiano Natural E MellowPiano J Natural E RockPiano Piano PL The next highest level in this case folde
265. messages 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt gt OWNER 2 Use 4A W 5 A V LANGUAGE buttons to select the language 3 Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display UTILITY T CONFIG I CONTIG 2 SCREEN OUT MEDIAY OWNER V SYSTEM RESET OWNER NAME A C 1 LANGUAGE ENGLISH F MAIN PICTURE Liquid j Li sl CL Je oC reg ES i FUNCTION E LANGUAGE J EXIT The Messages Shown in the Display A message information or confirmation dialog sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation When the message appears simply press the appropriate button UTILITY CL CONFIG 2 MSCREEN OUT Y MEDIA OWNER SYSTEM RESET DEVICE LIST co ESCH WC Ot aape cd CH Dem E formatting CH 4 otherwise all data will be deleted d kb CH CH SONG AUTO OPEN When the media is inserted to the device selected in the device list the first song in the media will be selected automatically In this example press the F YES button to start formatting the MEDIA USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk etc The language selected here is also used for various Mes sages shown during operations CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 63 uonesadgo siseg Instant Selection of the Displays Direct Access Ins
266. mmon setting for all Voices 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt D CONTROLLER gt TAB gt KEYBOARD KEYBOARD PANEL PANEL gt A 1 INITIAL TOUCH ITINITIAL TOUCH NORMAL Arar 2 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN MASTER Press the 1 A W 2 A V buttons to specify the touch response HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce high volume Best for players with a heavy touch HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for high volume NORMAL Standard touch response TOUCH SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even with light play ing strength Best for players with a light touch LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT2 e When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity set Touch to OFF for Ie the corresponding parts by pressing the 5 Y 7 W buttons When i S Touch is set to OFF you can specify the fixed volume level by press ing the 4 A W button e The touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices DR BE e This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard gt e a Le J Le 6 7 8 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 29 30 Using the Pedals The instrument features three pedals Left Pedal Damper Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Damper Pedal Right The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an J actual ac
267. more than one screen Press a A W button corresponding to the screen number 3 Press the EXIT button to exit from Demo EXIT 24 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Operations in the Basic Displays To start with you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide There are three basic displays Main display gt See below File selection display gt page 26 Function display gt page 27 Operation of the Main Display The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument It is the same display that appears when the instrument is turned on You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from the Main display DMH About information in the Main display See page 65 A J buttons 1 T The A J buttons correspond to the settings E a indicated next to the buttons Soo For example press the F button and the GrandPianol Voice RIGHT 1 selection display will appear SS SE in the display f EES deg 14 V 8 A Y buttons fo Ee The 1 A W 8 A V buttons correspond to ae LI NewBank the parameters which are indicated above the ei E buttons d For example pressing the 1 A button will increase the Song page 35 volume DIRECT ACCESS and EXIT buttons 2 Here s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display Simply press the DIRECT ACCES
268. mpaniment A Press the GUIDE button 5 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback The Guide lamps in the chord section of the keyboard flash according to the chords of the Song Try practic ing the chords matching the Guide lamps Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings Voices or effects etc for the currently selected Style with the touch of a single button If you ve already decided which Style you wish to use you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you T Select a Style page 46 step 2 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 4 buttons Not only does this instantly call up all the ONE TOUGH SETTING settings Voices effects etc that match the current Style it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC START so that you can immediately start playing the Style 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the selected Style starts BOG Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 132 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections OTS Link The convenient OTS One Touch Setting Link function lets you automatically have
269. mpaniment with the Auto Accom paniment Feature Style Playback The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing chords with your left hand This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra even if you re playing by yourself The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the Styles The Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop jazz and many others STYLE CONTROL OPOPaROCK O BALLAD DANCE OSWING amp JAZZQ R amp B O COUNTRY O LATIN QBALLROOM O UE O WORLD PIANIST L ACMP_ AUTO SYNC SYNC START ON OFF FILL IN INTRO MAIN VARIATION BI ENDING rit STOP START STOP MUSIC FINDER REAK O O O o o O o o o o o O 0 Ei eee TITETT Ee V eg tv D kl 44 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Playing Mary Had a Little Lamb with the Auto Accompaniment Feature MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB Traditional Style Country Pop C C G C 3 2 1 2 3 2 3 5 Gej d oe G d 2 Ye O 5 O HD HIEIBI HARIRIE HDD c G c Ending 3 21 2 3 2 3 2 1 4 SSS D
270. n the Setup operation page 162 Make sure to checkmark the VOICE item in step 2 of the Setup procedure Using the Practice Function Guide The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes location and timing for you to play Also when you sing along with a Song playback using a connected microphone the instrument automatically adjusts the timing of the Song playback to match your vocal performance To use the practice function press the GUIDE button Selecting the Guide Function Type Call up the setting display FUNCTION gt B SONG SETTING Use the A B buttons to select the desired Guide function type The following types are available GUIDE MODE Guide lamp indicates the next note to play A Playback pauses until you play the correct note F FUNCTION Zi gt cl GUIDE LAMP SEN Rerear Move H D GUIDE LAMP C 1 L ke Ss ogo st es d CHANNEL SETTING LYRICS QUICK GU START PAT AUTO TRACK2 TRACKI CH SEIT lt S Ve Saving the Guide settings in the SONG SETTING display You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data page 162 For Songs to which Guide settings have been saved the Guide function will be auto matically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected Turning the keyboard guide lamps off Press the C GUIDE LAMP but ton in the SONG
271. nd or LEFT parts are e Recording the RIGHT 1 part recorded onto separate tracks Select the voice for the RIGHT 1 part by calling up the Voice selection dis play page 32 With Multi Track Recording you e Recording the Dual voice RIGHT 1 and 2 parts can record RIGHT 2 part individ Turn on the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 button page 80 Select the ually voice for each keyboard part RIGHT 1 2 by calling up the Voice selec tion display page 32 e Recording the LEFT part Turn on the PART ON OFF SPLIT LEFT button page 81 Select the voice for the LEFT part by calling up the Voice selection display page 32 e Recording Styles 1 Select a Style page 45 2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO buttons as necessary e Using Registration Memory panel setups Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons 3 While holding the SONG REC button press the SONG TRACK but tons to be recorded REC TRACK1 Oe e Recording your performance Press the SONG TRACK 1 R button for the right hand part recording and or the SONG TRACK 2 L button for the left hand part recording L 00 be Do DD me fe me fe 6 DD B oO 2 V ob Z TD D es Recording Styles Press the SONG EXTRA TRACKS STYLE button e Recording your performance and the Style playback simultaneously Press the SONG TRACK 1 R TRACK 2 L buttons and the SONGIEXTRA TRACKS STYL
272. ng the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks The floppy disk drive is optional For instructions on installing the floppy disk drive see page 213 The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you ve cre ated on the instrument to floppy disk and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care Follow the important precautions below Floppy Disk Compatibility e 3 5 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used Formatting a Floppy Disk e If you find that you are unable to use new blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices you may need to format them For details on how to format a disk see page 68 Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting Make sure to check before hand whether or not the disk contains important data 2 NOTE Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable as is on other devices Inserting Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive e Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward towards the disk slot Carefully insert the disk into the slot slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out 2 NOTE Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks Rem
273. ng the SONG REC button while holding the SONG REC but press the 1A W 8A V buttons to ton press the 2 A button to set the set the desired channels to REC 1 channel 2 to REC Normally the keyboard parts should be recorded to channels 1 8 and the Styles should be recorded to channels 9 16 To cancel the channel selection press the SONG REC button again MAIN TRANSPOSE J 103 femmt h Natural y D o GrandPianol 3 de CJ SONG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ll 12 13 14 15 16 REC Zeg Use the C D buttons to select the Press the D button to select desired part for the channel to be the RIGHT2 recorded This determines which part keyboard or Style Rhythm 1 2 Bass etc is recorded to each of the channels selected in step 2 Default channel part assignments are shown in the section About Song chan nels page 147 To close PART selection display press the EXIT button i Start recording The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording page 145 Press the SONG STOP button to stop recording O REC STOP O PLAY PAUSE CJ m NE SYNC START When recording is finished a message appears prompting you to save the recorded performance appears To close the message press the EXIT but ton For instructions on saving Song data se
274. ng with a two measure main section the two measures are repeatedly recorded Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition loop letting you record while hearing previously recorded material e Overdub Recording This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data without deleting the original data In Style recording the recorded data is not deleted except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear page 120 and Delete page 120 For example if you start recording with a two measure MAIN section the two measures are repeated many times Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels For all other channels except rhythm delete the original data before recording 118 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles Oo Ona KRW N OFF OFF Overdub recording not possible Delete the data before recording Overdub recording possible Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording editing page 45 When creating a new Style from scratch press the C NEW STYLE button from the display shown in step 5 below Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU Press the B button to
275. ng with Your Own Performance Changing the Key Transpose gt See below Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics and Text on external monitor gt page 59 Making Announcements Between Songs gt page 59 Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice Karao Key gt page 142 Changing the Key Transpose You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key For example the Song data is in F but you feel most comfortable singing in D and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C To match up the keys set the Master Transpose to 0 the Keyboard Transpose to 2 and the Song Transpose to 3 This brings the keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key 1 can up the operation display FUNCTION gt D CONTROLLER gt TAB gt KEYBOARD PANEL gt B TRANSPOSE ASSIGN 2 Press the 4 A V 5 A V button to select the desired transpose type The following types are available Select the one most suited to your purpose KEYBOARD Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback controlled by what you play in the chord section of the keyboard SONG Transposes the pitch of Song playback MASTER Transpose the overall pitch of the instrument 3 Press the TRANSPOSE button to transpose You can set the value in semitone steps To reset the transpose value press the buttons simultaneously A
276. note triplets BEAT CONVERTER SWING Actually changes the timing of the beats specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above to the selected value For example when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to 8 Beat and BEAT CONVERTER is set to 12 all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th note triplet timing The 16A and 16B Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to 12 Beat are variations on a basic 16th note setting Produces a swing feel by shifting the timing of the back beats depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above For example if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8 Beat the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd 4th 6th and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel The settings A through E produce different degrees of swing with A being the most subtle and E being the most pronounced FINE Selects a variety of Groove templates to be applied to the selected section The PUSH settings cause certain beats to be played early while HEAVY settings delay the timing of certain beats The numbered settings 2 3 4 5 determine which beats are to be affected All beats up to the specified beat but not including the first beat will be played early or delayed for example the 2nd and 3rd beats if 3 is selected In all cases A types produce minimum effect B types produce medium effect and
277. note value Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the song Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the fol lowing three types The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in Display the note name at the left of the note step 1 is set to ON A B C Note names are indicated as letters C D E F G A B FIXED DO SOTE NAME Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language The language is specified in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display page 63 MOVABLE DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals and as such are relative to the key The root note is indicated as Do For example in the key of G major the root note of So would be indicated as Do As with Fixed Do the indication differs depending on the selected language 3 Press the 8 A OK button to apply the setting BIG Save the notation view settings The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song page 162 One handed Practice with the Guide Lamps The key guide lamps indicate the notes you should play when you should play them and how long you should hold them down You can also practice at your own pace since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes cor rectly Here mute the right or left hand part and try practicing the part using the guide lamps Practicing the Right hand Part TR
278. ns Press the button once to select the rest value and once again to actually enter it A rest having spec ified note length will be entered Pe gd LA LA Ge Ee E L E CJ LC 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 LJ CJ OLE Play the C4 key MAI Press the SONG STOP button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE REW FF O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE REW FF CWO IDO gt a e CH NEW SYNC START NEW SONG SYN g 8 9 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display If you want you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner page 158 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted 1 2 Use the A B buttons in the STEP RECORD display page 148 to select the data you want to delete Press the J DELETE button to delete the selected data 150 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual About items which can be selected via the G H I buttons in the Step Record display G button Determines the velocity loudness of the note to be entered Items Velocity to be recorded Kbd Vel Ac
279. nt Reference to Quick Guide Pages Practicing with the Preset HESE page 35 Playing Back Songs Beie Practicing vosos page 35 Displaying Music Notation SCONE ooog page 38 One handed Practice with the Guide Lamps eee page 39 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function eee page 41 Recording Your PEm nmanGe E page 42 Singing Along with Song playback Karaoke or Your Own Performance oee eeen eera eee a EEEE secs page 54 Eer page 54 SIMBEME Witty they ii CssID IS Play EE page 55 el page 55 eer HE page 56 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Eer page 58 Recording Your Remenmance as NUCMOn teresa page 60 Compatible Song Types The instrument can play back the following Song types Preset Songs Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display Your Own Recorded Songs These are Songs which you ve recorded page 42 page 143 and saved to the USER USB display USB is available when you connect an USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk to the instrument Commercially Available Song Data Song data downloaded from the Yamaha Web site and commercially available Disk Songs are available when you connect the optional floppy disk drive to the instru ment The instrument is compatible with the Song disks floppy disks that bear the following marks GENERAL GENERAL lt G mia WS KE e GS A 136 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Operations for Song Playback This section explains de
280. nterface installed The second connection possibility involves a separate external MIDI interface connected to the computer via a USB port or a serial port modem or printer terminal Using standard MIDI cables connect the MIDI OUT ter minal of the external interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the instrument and connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface USB port or serial port modem or MIDI cable printer terminal MIDI IN MIDI interface Instrument feminal HI a lt a im terminal Computer DECA Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer Connecting to a USB type LAN Adaptor and USB Storage Device via the USB TO DEVICE Terminal There are two ways of using the USB TO DEVICE ter minal E By connecting the USB type LAN adaptor you can directly access special Internet websites for down loading music data page 176 E By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable you can save data you ve created to the connected device as well as read data from the connected device 2 NOTE About the USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the correspondin
281. o Recorder use the compatible USB flash memory When the USB flash memory is not compatible it is not likely to be able to record playback normally e Before using a USB storage device be sure to read Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc on page 22 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 3 Press the USB button USB USB 3 ES USB AUDIO RECORDER A Press the E USB AUDIO RECORDER button to call up the recording display USB AUDIO RECORDER display 5 if necessary press the E PROPERTY button to call up the Property display then check the information of the USB storage device USB STYLE USB AUDIO RECORDER mme 00 00 PERTY RECORDI REC Do not take out the USB storage device or turn off the instrument during recording Lummen 4 AUDITION a L The following information is indicated on the PROPERTY display DRIVE NAME Number of the USB storage device USB 1 USB 2 etc VE E EE Size of USB storage device FREE AREA tsca cscs iiessteibodintaesaedeocenceteuae Available recording space on the USB storage device POSSIBLE TIME eg castes Sessa dies Available time for recording Press the F OK EXIT button to close the PROPERTY display BIG The USB storage device of USB1 is selected as the record
282. o the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 Selecting multiple lines of data While holding the J MULTI SELECT button press the A B buttons Displaying specific types of event FILTER You can select the event types to be displayed in the CHORD and 1 16 tab displays This is convenient for example when you wish to have only the note events shown page 165 A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 The data recorded by Realtime Recording will not appear on the display and cannot be edited CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 163 s8u0s sunipy pue Bunea Suter Recording Your Performance About the events shown in the display 2 SONG CREATOR NewSong About Clock A unit of note resolution The Quantize size is the number of clocks per quarter note On the instrument one clock is equal to 1 1920th of a quarter note n Urs BEAT CLOCK DATA ENTRY E cory ST Dam el CH Example 001 1 1440 Lo Clock Beat Measure number BAR Indicates the location position of the corresponding event Same as the indication at the lower left of the display Indicates the event types see below Indicates the event values Event types sho
283. of per forming together on stage If the iAFC effect is slight or inaudible If it seems that iAFC is not effective when playing back Songs or Styles turn the iAFC feature off 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt H iAFC SETTING 2 Press the D button to turn iAFC off Sa010A Supp pue Buea 2Zutsn COO Li The iAFC effect sounds from the Soundboard of the instrument The iAFC effect is not applied to the sound of the Se B LO headphones or the output from the AUX OUT The iAFC effect e is not turned on when the lid is closed or open with the short lid prop CD 2 jarc ED C DEPTH E DYNAMIC J DAMPER EFFECT SPATIAL EFFECT J a v CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 83 Changing Pitch Please note that the Tune func tion does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices wn o 2 e gt DD me uw me G 5 DD D o v 2 V G e o D Hz Hertz This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second Changing Pitch Transpose Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down in semitones e Transposing during performance You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instru ment by pressing the TRANSPOSE buttons e Transposing before performance Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display You can set the
284. ollowing operation step numbers In this example keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display 2 5 68 10 13 14 16 Press the G button to select mp SONG CREATOR NewSong STEP RECORD 1920PPQ BAR BEAT CLOCK LJ Le L La LJ CGJ J 3 1 2 3 4 4 GG LJ CJ CJ Press the H button to select Tenuto Press the I button to select normal note type Press the 5 A W button to select the half note length Om BR WN While holding F3 on the keyboard press the 7 A W button Before you go on to step 6 release the F3 key and the 7 A W button BAR BEAT CLOCK w a DZ 6 Press the H button to select the Staccato 7 Press the 7 A W button to select the eighth note length 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Play the keys E3 F3 and A3 in order according to the notation exam MATE NE ST Press the G button to select f Press the H button to select Tenuto Press the I button to select dotted Press
285. om several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program MIDI operates on the same basic principle The trans mitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel MIDI Transmit Channel via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument If the receiving instru ment MIDI channel MIDI Receive Channel matches the Transmit Channel the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument A MIDI Receive channel 2 k 00000 E MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI cable NOTE The instrument s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI LOCAL CONTROL page 202 For example several parts or channels can be transmit ted simultaneously including the Style data as shown below 198 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Example Recording a performance with the auto accompa niment Style playback sound of the instrument to an exter nal sequencer MIDI cable RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument Channel Track 1 Channel Track 2 Channel Track 3 Channe Track 4 Channel Track 5 Channel Track 6 Channel Track 7 Channel Track 8 Channe Track 9 Channe Track 10 Channe Track
286. on buttons ceeeeeeeeeseeeees P 32 VOICE EFFECT LTE P 86 ONE TOUCH SETTING Sr D Ut 8 sscavedisyesschssa stsaveddsd eg Sakee uge egee P 50 LOTS LINKI Dutton sensn a Kai Drum Kit jcons Data List Drum key Assignment List Pedals BEE P 30 Sostenuto pedal scicsavesrcotsstavediseatansinedinonynetecs P 30 RETTEN P 30 Keyboard guide James K 20 Mic signal over lamps ue P 54 For quick reference also see the alphabetically sorted Panel Button Chart on page 219 For information on the jacks and connectors located on the bottom left of the instrument see page 189 The USB TO DEVICE terminal is also located on the bottom left of the instrument CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 13 uoonponu E e Q me e Ss c 14 Playing the Keyboard Ah CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or clos ing it Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed Be careful to avoid catching fin gers yours or others espe cially children s between the cover and the unit N CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove This could cause elec tric shock short circuit fire or other serious damage
287. ones having a power source turn on the power first Adjust the INPUT VOLUME knob while singing into the microphone Adjust the controls while checking the SIGNAL and OVER lamps The SIGNAL lamp lights to indicate that an audio signal is being received Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp is light The OVER lamp lights when the input level is too high Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp does not light Disconnecting the microphone 1 Set the INPUT VOLUME knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position 2 Disconnect the microphone from the MIC LINE IN jack DETH Set the INPUT VOLUME knob to the minimum position before turning off the power CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Singing with the Lyrics Display Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data 1 select a Song page 35 2 Press the LYRICS TEXT button to display the lyrics When the Text display appears press the 1 W LYRICS button to display the lyrics 3 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays A Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback BU ZO e When the lyrics are unreadable You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to International or Japanese in the Song Setting display FUNCTION gt B SONG SETTING if the lyrics shown are garbled or un
288. ons to set the value CAUTION 6 Press the EXIT button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis Settings in the TALK SETTING play tab display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from the display However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings will be lost 174 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Adjustable Items Parameters in the TALK SETTING Tab Display VOLUME This determines the output volume of the microphone sound PAN This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound REVERB DEPTH This sets the depth of the reverb effects applied to the micro phone sound CHORUS DEPTH This sets the depth of the chorus effects applied to the micro phone sound TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUA TOR This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the overall sound excepting the microphone input allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound DSP MIC ON OFF This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF DSP MIC TYPE This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the micro phone sound DSP MIC DEPTH This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound Talk Setting CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 175 auoydossiw e suis pen D C D g v e E gt Ki O D el g gt O E g
289. ontaining Phrase Marks you can use the FF or REW buttons to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song If you don t want to set the Song position by the phrase marks press the E button and select BAR in the window showing the Song position For Songs not containing Phrase Marks SONG POSITION BAR 001 REW FF For Songs containing Phrase Mark SONG POSITION 001 2 Press the EXIT button to close the pop up window showing the cur rent measure number or Phrase Mark number E Repeat Playback Chain Playback 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt B SONG SETTING 2 Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the H I buttons The available parameters are shown below REPEAT MODE OFF Plays through the selected Song then stops SINGLE Plays through the selected Song repeatedly ALL Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder containing the current Song repeatedly RANDOM Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the folder containing the current Song PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks you can set Repeat Playback to ON or OFF When this is on the part corre sponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is repeatedly played back The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark num ber are the same as in the steps 1 2 of the section Moving back and forth rewind and fast forward see above E Queuing
290. onthelMalniDisplayaecs tenes essere 25 Operation of the File Selection Display 26 Operation of the Function Display a 27 Playing EE 28 PAW ALAS tie PRIMO Vao saosin 28 Blaying Various Voices me a 32 Practicing with the Song een 35 Playing Back Songs Before Practicing 00 35 Displaying Music Notation Score m n 38 One handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ER Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function 41 Recording WCW eroa 42 Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology nene eee 43 Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accompaniment Feature Style Playback 44 Playing Mary Had a Little Lamb with the Auto E HIE EE 45 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song ea US IM 52 Calling up the panel settings to match the Style Repertoire Lieve aeea EE E 53 Singing Along with Song Playback Karaoke or Your Own Performance cccccceeeeeeeeees 54 ConnectingialMicropho ne a eee 54 Singing with the Lyrics Display een 55 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ua 56 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your OWwmikenonmance Eaa A A E R esses 58 Recording Your Performance as Audio USB Audio Recorder Auen 60 Recording Your Performance as Audio 60 Playing Back the Recorded Performance 62 Basic Operation Basic Operation ccccccsssseeeeeO3 Selecting Message Language ee 63 The Messages Shown in the Displa
291. ookmark display appears showing a list of the currently registered bookmarks The title of the currently selected web page is shown below the list 2 Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the 3 A V ADD button BOOKMARK LIST PAGE TITLE KEIER ices EES bz EH ADD MOVE cuaver penere CLOSE a v 6 gt gt b L L L L CJ CJ H H lt CJ LJ 4 5 Operations in the Special Website 3 Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the 14 W A V button BOOKMARK LIST PAGE TITLE KEIER GH GONTRON MENT ry E E Lal La Le A A JI Oe Il Ce 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 4 To register the bookmark press the 7 A W EXECUTE button or press the 8 A W CANCEL button to cancel 5 To return to the browser press the 8 A W CLOSE button Opening a Bookmarked Page Press the 4 A Y BOOKMARK button to call up the Bookmark dis play 2 Press the 1 A V A V button to select the desired bookmark BOOKMARK LIST MOVE CHANGE DELETE DG 3 Press the 2 A W VIEW button to open the page of the selected bookmark CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 181 yOUsJa U BY 0 A IAIG Laoue au SUJUD pen D C D g
292. oon as you play the keyboard PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indi cated Punch In measure then starts overwrite recording at that point You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the 3 A V button E PUNCH OUT settings REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the Punch Out point This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the specified Punch Out measure set with the corresponding display button at which point recording stops and normal playback continues This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the 6 A V buttons Recording Your Performance ZN CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 159 s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter Recording Your Performance Examples of re recording with various Punch In Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In Out function The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight measure phrase are re rec
293. orded PUNCH IN setting Original data PUNCH OUT setting E NORMAL Start overwrite recording Stop recording 2 y Yv REPLACE ALL i z A z E NORMAL Start overwrite recording Stop recording vV v PUNCHOUT i z 3 z s eem NORMAL ES recording Za overwrite recording Play original data PUNCH OUT AT 006 5 idii Play the keyboard to TER FIRST KEY ON P E Original data start overwrite recording Stop recording DEES E z 5 igi Play the keyboard to e FIRST KEY ON PI SN Original data start overwrite recording ee recording PUNCH OUT as 4 a Play back Original dat Play the keyboard to Stop overwrite recording Play original data FIRST KEY ON SE eek w Start overwrite recording v PUNCH OUT AT 00G Rm a a Play back Original data Stop recording PUNCH IN AT 003 gh Sag i W Start overwrite recording E S REPLACE ALL e a 5 Play back Original data Stop recording 2 PUNCH IN AT 003 KE W Start overwrite recording Vv PUNCH OUT 3 e Z Play back Original data Stop overwrite recording Play original data PUNCH IN AT 003 z W Start overwrite recording v PUNCH OUT AT 006 es a s eelere 1 To avoid overwriting measures 1 2 start recording from measure 3 sg Previously recorded data 2 To stop recording press the REC button at the end of measure 5 Newly recorded data Deleted data E Pedal Punch In Out settings W
294. ording method Quick Recording Multi Track Recording or Step Recording Basic Editing Operation 1 Select a Song for editing 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU 3 Press the A button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record or edit Songs A Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB lt gt buttons and edit the Song SONG CREATOR NewSong tip Es REC START NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when the song starts Bop SAVE PEDAL REC START REC END PUNCH IN OUT L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO 2 V G Z D D e Re Recording a Specific Section Punch In Out REC MODE een page 159 This lets you re record a specific section of a Song e Editing Channel Events CHANNEL ann page 160 This lets you edit the channel events For example you can delete data or transpose notes by channel e Editing Note or Chord Events CHORD 1 16 00008 page 163 This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords e Editing System Event GVS EN NENNEN page 165 This lets you change the tempo or the time signature Editing Lyrics LYRICS cccccsssssscessessesseteeseessesessssseeees page 166 This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events 158 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Re Recording a Specific Section Punch In Out RE
295. orp Administered in the USA and Canada by Music amp Media International Inc Administered for the World excluding the USA and Canada by RAK Music Publishing Ltd International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST WARNING When using any electrical or electronic product basic precautions should always be followed These precautions include but are not limited to the following 1 Read all Safety Instructions Installation Instructions Spe cial Message Section items and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections includ ing connection to the main supply 2 Main Power Supply Verification Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold If you should move or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and if applicable instruc tions The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate For name plate location please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual 3 This product may be equipped with a polarized plug one blade wider than the other If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet turn the plug over and try again If the problem persists contact
296. ory device to which data has already been recorded check first that no important data remains on the device then format it page 68 and try recording again CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 209 xipuaddy Ba D c bp bi CG ka Removing the CGP 1000 from its Case and Assembling the Unit N CAUTION e Be careful not to confuse parts and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below e Assembly should be carried out by at least four persons e Be sure to use the correct screw size as indicated below Use of incorrect screws can damage the instrument e Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the assembly of each unit e To disassemble reverse the assembly sequence given below Have a Phillips screwdriver and a hexagonal wrench ready SJ OO ES Remove the parts shown below from the box 2 Remove the brackets Unscrew the brackets 3 Attach the right front and rear legs Cut the bands Remove the top cover Remove the front screws Remove the side screws O Pull off the cover Remove the parts Attach and securely tighten the right front leg with the 70mm hexagon bolts 70mm hexagon bolt x 4 92mm hexagon bolt x 2 Pedal brace rod x 2 III AC power cord 4 0 x 20mm screw x 4 444 Attach and securely tighten the rear leg with the
297. ould appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it e Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms e Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple connector Doing so can result in lower sound quality or possibly cause overheating in the outlet e Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury e Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components e Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Oth
298. ous functions and performance conveniences that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument It allows you to play several different Voices together in a layer or play one Voice with your left hand while you play a different Voice or even two layered Voices with your right Keyboard Parts Right 1 Right 2 Left Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part Right 1 Right 2 and Left You can combine these parts by using the PART ON OFF buttons to create a rich ensemble sound Keyboard Part Combinations E Playing a single Voice Right 1 part You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range This is used for nor mal performance for example with the piano Voice Make sure the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 SPLIT LEFT buttons are turned off O DUALIAGHT2 Right 1 part S Dual Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Right 1 and 2 parts You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound YO SPLITU FT n t tO Right 1 part Refer to page 80 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part E Split Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 and Left parts You can play different Voices with the left and right hands For example try play ing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right The keyboard lamp will light at the split point of the keyboard PART ON OFF O DUALa re Lent part Right
299. oustic piano letting you sustain the sound of the voices even e SS after releasing the keys e BEd Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held e Certain Voices in the PERCUSSION amp DRUM KIT GM amp XG and GM2 When you press the damper pedal groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal here the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain Sostenuto Pedal Center If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal f while holding the note s the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is p held All subsequent notes will not sustain BM e Certain Voices such as STRINGS or BRASS sustain continuously when the sostenuto pedal is pressed e Certain Voices in the PERCUSSION amp DRUM KIT GM amp XG and GM2 When you press the sostenuto groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal pedal here while holding the note s the notes will sustain as Left Pedal long as you hold the pedal When the Piano voice is selected pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected Voice BET The depth of the left pedal effect can be adjusted page 101 Foot Controller Footswitch An optional Yamaha foot controller FC7 or footswitch FC4 or FC5
300. oving a Floppy Disk e After checking that the instrument is not accessing the floppy disk checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in When the floppy disk is ejected pull it out of the drive If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck do not try to force it but instead try pressing the eject button again or try re inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again Access of the disk indicates an active operation such as recording playback or deletion of data If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on the disk is automatically accessed since the instrument checks whether the disk has data Ab CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive e Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors Cleaning the Disk Drive Read Write Head e Clean the read write head regularly This instrument employs a precision magnetic read write head which after an extended period of use will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventu ally cause read and write errors e
301. ow to control Harmony is muted turned off during song playback OFF Channels 1 16 When set to OFF song data control over harmony is turned off When set to one of the values 1 16 note data played from a song on the instrument or an external MIDI sequencer contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the harmony This setting is linked to the HARMONY CH setting in the SONG SETTING display page 141 KEYBOARD OFF Keyboard control over harmony is turned off UPPER Notes played to the right of the split point control the har mony LOWER Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony e BAL This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal your own voice and Vocal Harmony Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal When this is set to L lt H63 L Lead Vocal H Vocal Harmony only the Vocal Harmony is output when it is set to L63 gt H only the lead vocal is output o e S Qa Q 2 ao oD c w 172 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound e MODE All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce har mony in different ways The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony mode and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice The three modes are described below AUTO When the ACMP ON OFF or LEFT is se
302. ows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument s internal voices and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the exter nal sequencer and or play an external tone generator E Clock setting etc CLOCK Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices If you are using the instrument with an external sequencer MIDI computer or other MIDI device and you want to synchronize it to that device set this parameter to the appropriate setting MIDI USB 1 or USB 2 In this case make sure that the external device is connected properly e g to the instru ments MIDI IN terminal and that it is properly transmit ting a MIDI clock signal When this is set for control by an external device MIDI USB 1 or USB 2 the Tempo is indicated as Ext in the Main display TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock F8 transmission on or off When set to OFF no MIDI clock or Start Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument s transpose setting page 58 is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI 202 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual START STOP Determines whether incoming FA start and FC stop messages affe
303. ozen i e to remain unchanged by pressing the 8 A W button Press the FREEZE button on the panel to turn the Freeze function on play However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings willbe lost Press the EXIT button to exit from the operation display Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order Registration Sequence As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings without having to take your hands from the keyboard The convenient Registration Sequence func tion lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify by simply using the TAB lt 1 gt buttons or the pedal as you play 1 Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence page 132 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt E REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET gt TAB lt 4 gt REGISTRATION SEQUENCE REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET REGISTRATION SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET o REGISTRATION REGISTRATION BANK SEQUENCE E ENABLE NewBank j REGIST PEDAL SEQUENCE DATA OAT ST CURSOR RIE AE a 3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings specify here how the pedal will be used to advance or to reverse through the sequence Use the C button to select the pedal for advancing thro
304. p FOLDERS is selected VOFF and Factory Reset is executed a a a a a a a a J OB C LJ GJ CJ GJ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory pro grammed settings by pressing the 4 A button Press the D button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single File For the items below you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall Make all desired settings on the instrument 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB gt SYSTEM RESET Ab CAUTION This operation deletes all your original data for the respec tive item MIDI SETUP USER EFFECT MUSIC FINDER and FILES amp FOLDERS CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 75 uonesado aiseg CG amp gS o oa O o o K DO 76 Data Backup CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 3 Press one of the F I buttons to call up the relevant display for sav ing your data SYSTEM SETUP Parameters set on the various displays such as the FUNCTION UTILITY and microphone setting display are handled as a single System Setup file Refer to the sep arate Data List booklet for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are handled as a single file USER EFFECT The User Effect settings inc
305. performance CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 7 Save the recorded performance 1 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the appropriate tab USER USB etc to which you want to save the data Select USER to save the data to internal memory or select USB to save the data to a USB storage device 3 Press the 6 V SAVE button to call up the file naming display 4 Enter the file name page 73 5 Press the 8 A OK button to save the file To cancel the Save operation press the 8 CANCEL button Ah CAUTION The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save oper ation When the following message appears Song changed Save Song speichern Song modifi Sauv Song cambiado Guardar Salvare Song The recorded data has not yet been saved To save the data press the G YES button to open the Song selection dis play and save the data see above To cancel the operation press the H NO button Playing Songs saved to a USER USB storage device Refer to page 36 Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback FUNCTION RO Before using performance as
306. pitch changes and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released PORTAMENTO The portamento effect a smooth slide between notes can be produced while the pedal is pressed Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style i e a note is played while the preceding note is still held Portamento Time can also be adjusted from the Mixing Console page 90 This function does not affect certain Natural Voices which would not sound appropriately with this function PITCH BEND Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal MOD S ART1 Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard Moreover various effects can be added to the S Articulation Voice page 78 The effect becomes deeper when press ing down the foot controller You can turn this function on off for each keyboard part on this display MOD S ART2 ALT As a variation on MOD S ART1 the effects waveform can be switched on off by the pedal footswitch The effects waveform is alternately turned on and off each time the pedal footswitch is pressed You can turn this function on off for each keyboard part on this display S ART SW When you use a S Articulation voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal foot switch you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal footswitch You can turn this function on off for each keyboard part on this display DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIAT
307. r is shown Each folder shown in E Piano Flute amp Woodwind this display contains appropriately cat E Piano UE egorized Voices aa Strings L Trumpet ID Guitar amp Bass IO IG Saxophone Accordion VOICE CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 67 CG 2 o oa O o o K DO 68 Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display The indications USB 1 USB 2 etc will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices CGP 1000 Owner s Manual File Folder Operations in the File Selection Display e page 69 e Copying Files Folders Copy amp D stel i page 70 MOVING Files Cut Paste nasyon eege ANNE EN page 71 s Deleting Fleeiboli ere ex er rsss a E E page 71 Renaming FIlES FOLENS eesevsscesvoswevatest anaie EE ORE ERGA page 72 e Selecting Custom Icons for Files shown at the left of file name page 72 s Cheating a NEW Folden rinnassa PE a A E dE ovens page 72 e Entering Characters cisisissiiises aspaided cues aae e EENE A SRA EO page 73 Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted a message may appear prompting you to format the device media If so execute the format operation Ahh CAUTION The format operation deletes any previously existing data Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data Proceed with caution espe cially when connecting multiple USB storage media
308. ral parts are being played simultaneously DSP1 STYLE PART In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types SONG CHANNNEL 1 16 the instrument has special DSP effects that include additional effects usually used for a specific part such as distortion and tremolo DSP2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 LEFT Any unused DSP blocks are automatically DSP3 SONG CHANNEL 1 16 assigned to the appropriate parts channels DSP4 as needed DSP5 DSP6 Microphone sound Dedicated for use only with the microphone sound 6 Use the 3 A V 4 A V buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect 7 Use the 5 A W 6 A V buttons to select the effect CATEGORY 8 Use the 7 A W 8 A W buttons to select the effect TYPE If you want to edit the effect parameters go on to the next operation E Editing and Saving the effect Sa010A Supp pue Buea 2Zutsn 9 Press the F PARAMETER button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters MIXING CONSOLE VOL VOICE V FILTER TUNE J EFFECT BLOCK DSP6 OFF CATEGORY DELAY TYPE TEMPO DELAY w gt o NOC CATEGORY CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 93 wn oO 2 fo gt DD fe me uw me G o DD Z D o v 2 O ab e o D 94 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Re selecting the Effect block category and type Use the 1 A Y 3 A W but tons The re selected effect con fi
309. rd part This also determines the depth for the function For details see page 192 Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency range The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower Filter can be used to produce elec tronic synthesizer like effects BRIGHTNESS HARMONIC CONTENT Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter see diagram Higher values result in a brighter sound Volume Cutoff frequency Frequency pitch These frequencies are Cutoff range passed by the filter Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency resonance set in BRIGHTNESS above see diagram Higher values result in a more pronounced effect Volume Resonance Frequency pitch Voice Creating Voice Set CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 101 s 2104 Supp pue Buea BUISN wn oO 2 fo gt DD fe me uw me G o DD D T v 2 O G e o D Voice Creating Voice Set Vibrato A quavering vibrating sound effect that is produced by regu larly modulating the pitch of the Voice Switching the VIBE ROTOR on off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the VIBE ROTOR on off when the VIBE ROTOR ON OFF function is properly assigned page 191 10
310. rd with the Style stopped and still hear the accom paniment chord In this condition called Stop Accompaniment any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the chord root type are shown in the display From the display in page 110 you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status OFF EE The chord played in the chord section will not sound STYLE omg shee The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices of the selected Style RK KE The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice regardless of the selected Style OTS Link Timing This applies to the OTS Link function page 51 This parameter determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION A D change The OTS LINK button must be on Real Time One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN VARIATION button NeXt Bar eege One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure after you press a MAIN VARIATION button Synchro Stop Window This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled When the SYNC STOP button is turned on and this is set to a value other than OFF this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal letting you release
311. rds Press the F SORT BY button to sort the records e MUSIC The record is sorted by song title The record is sorted by Style name The record is sorted by beat The record is sorted by tempo Changing the order of the records Press the G SORT ORDER button to change the order of the records ascending or descending CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 53 54 Singing Along with Song Playback Karaoke or Your Own Performance Connect a microphone to the instrument and sing along with Song playback Karaoke or your own perfor mance The lyrics can be displayed when the Song contains lyric data Sing with the microphone as you read the lyr ics shown in the display Lyrics can also be displayed with the music score letting you play and sing while fol lowing along with the notation and lyrics LYRICS TEXT MIC SIGNAL OVER Connecting a Microphone 1 Make sure you have a conventional dynamic microphone 2 Set the INPUT VOLUME knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position 3 Connect the microphone to the MIC LINE IN jack BETIA Always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when nothing is con nected to the MIC LINE IN jack Since the MIC LINE IN jack is highly sensitive it may pick up and produce noise when nothing is connected 4 Set the MIC LINE switch to MIC 5 For microph
312. rds for Style Playback Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords If know the name of a chord but don t know how to play it you can have the instrument show you the notes to play Chord Tutor function 1 can up the operation display FUNCTION gt C STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING gt TAB lt 4 gt CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the 6 A W button to select the root note FINGERING CHORD TUTOR FINGERED MULTI FINGER Both Single Finger and gered are possible For CHORD NAME C Single Finger press the white black key s closest to the root note LLL TL ee CHORD SETTING FINGERING TYPE ROOT YPE 3 Press the 7 A W 8 A V button to select the chord type The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display BEG The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered no matter which fingering type is selected page 108 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 49 50 Checking How to Play Chords with the Guide Lamps For Songs containing chord data you can have the individual notes of the chords indicated with the Guide lamps on the instrument 1 select a Song page 35 2 Press the FUNCTION button and press the B button to call up the Song Setting dis play and make sure that the GUIDE MODE is set to Follow Lights 3 Press the ACMP ON OFF button to turn on Auto Acco
313. re returned to the original XG Voices CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 91 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE 7 Press the 8 A OK button to apply your Revoice settings To cancel the Revoice operation press the 8 W CANCEL button 8 In the VOL VOICE tab display press the F button to set SONG AUTO REVOICE to ON Effect Type E Selecting an Effect type 1 3 Same operation as in the Basic Procedure on page 88 In step 2 select the EFFECT tab 4 Press the F TYPE button to call up the Effect Type selection display MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART VOL VOICE V FILTER TUNE J EFFECT SONG STYLE MIC LEFT RIGHT RIGHT2 wn o 2 5 gt DD C E ke Lu a E bd oD E Ke be o 2 O o E T 5 DSP oe MIXING CONSOLE Stands for Digital Signal Proces or V FILTER Y 1 EFFECT sor or Processing DSP changes BLOCK DSPC OFFI i i i CATEGORY DELAY e D Ven wide range of effects j eC C BLOCK CATEGORY Ta v v nA v Gd Giel e A Eed H LJ 3 4 5 6 z 8 5 6 7 8 92 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Effect Block Effect applicable parts Effect characteristics REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club CHORUS All parts Produces a rich fat sound as if seve
314. re that the key cover does not pinch your fingers and do not insert a inger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument e Never insert or drop paper metallic or other objects into the gaps on the key cover panel or keyboard If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e Do not place vinyl plastic or rubber objects on the instrument since this might discolor the panel or keyboard e In the case of a model with a polished finish bumping the surface of the instrument with metal porcelain or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel Use caution e Do not rest your weight on or place heavy objects on the instrument and do not use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors e Do not use the instrument device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing oss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Since magnetic parts are built into this instrument you should be careful to never leave any video tapes cassette tapes floppy disks or any kind of magnetic storage media on the panel doing so may result in data loss or damage to the items Also avoid using the instrument near a television or computer monitor since interference may result
315. readable This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data page 162 Changing the Lyrics Background Picture You can change the background picture of the Lyrics display Press the 7 A W 8 A W BACKGROUND button in the Lyrics dis play to call up the Lyrics picture selection display for the available picture files and select the desired one Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display The lyrics background picture can be saved to the Song page 162 Changing the lyrics You can change the lyrics as desired page 166 Displaying Text This feature lets you show text files created on a computer in the display of the instrument enabling various useful possibilities such as the showing of lyrics chord names and text notes 1 Connect the USB storage device containing the text file to USB TO DEVICE terminal 2 Press the LYRICS TEXT button to display the text When the lyrics are displayed press the 1 W TEXT button to display the text 3 Press the 5 A W 6 A W TEXT FILE buttons to call up the Text selection display 4 Press the TAB lt 4 gt buttons to select the desired TAB 5 Double click one of the A J buttons to select a text file If the text is long use the TAB lt 1 gt buttons to select other pages BEG An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn pages page 191 The following additional settings are available in the TEXT display Switches the screen to the Lyrics display
316. record BI Tempo Lock Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record To turn on the Tempo Lock function press the I TEMPO LOCK button in the Music Finder display e Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 132 Calling up the panel settings to match the Style Rep ertoire The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings voice number etc for the currently selected Style Select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the PRESET USER tab on Style selection display BETIA The Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the PRESET USER tab The Repertoire function cannot be used for Styles saved to a USB storage device To use the Repertoire function save the desired Style in USER tab 2 Press the 7 A REPERTOIRE button The panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the Music Finder The list of the search results is shown on the SEARCH 2 display of the Music Finder N CAUTION When the result of searching the record in the SEARCH 2 display has already been shown the searched result is lost 3 Press the 2 A W 3 A V buttons to select the desired panel settings Sorting the reco
317. records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited Searching the Records You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword using the Search func tion of the Music Finder You can also save your favorite records in the FAVORITE display Press the MUSIC FINDER button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display 2 Press the TAB lt button to select the ALL tab The ALL tab display contains the preset Records 3 Press the 6 A SEARCH 1 button to call up the Search display MUSIC FINDER MUSIC STYLE BEAT TEMPO 2 Nights In A Big City 40 sBigBand 4 4 90 L SORT BY 69 Summers Long PowerRock AN 130 A Bridge To Cross Troubled PowerBallad 4 4 78 SORTORDER A Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 4 4 el EG A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad 4 4 88 A Feeling Of Love Tonight MovieBallad 4 4 68 TO A Fire Lighter Unpluggedi sa 118 A Misty Ballad CoolJazzBallad 4 4 70 TEMPO LOCK A Nickel In The Nickelodeon Dixieland2 4 4 214 ISS A Night In A Wonderful Land 6 8Orchestral 6 8 72 A Night Of Musie BroadwayBallad Au 64 EMNUBIC A Sad Song To Make Jude Be LoveSong 414 7 ae A Song For New England VintageGtrPop 4 4 152 RECORDS A Spy Does It Better PianoBallad one MUSIC STYLE SEARCH T RE SS E E ES s FE ICC OMe sl LJ LJ LJ GJG 1 2 4 5 6 T 3 8 4 Enter the s
318. right hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected above and the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard shown below PART ON OFF O DUALIRIGHT2 PART ON OFF O DUALIRIGHT2 ACMP ON OFF Split point LCE ACMP ON OFF O SPLIT LEFT SPLIT LEFT Mul Mul Chord section for Style playback and Left Voice and Right 1 Harmony effect chord section for Right 2 Oe bin ete Harmony effect Voices SPLIT LEFT ACMP ON OFF Split Point Split Point for Style for keyboard Voice me TATA emer bali Chord section Left Voice Voices for Style playback and Harmony effect Canceling the chord sound for the harmony effect This cancels the sound of the chord played in the chord range of the keyboard letting you hear only the Harmony effect Set ACMP ON OFF to On set SYNC START to Off and select Off for the Stop Accompani ment parameter CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 87 Sa010A Supp pue Buea 2Zutsn Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Multi Assign Type Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right hand section of the keyboard to separate parts Voices Both of the keyboard part RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 should be turned on wh
319. rity CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 191 s 214 q JAYIO YUM JUatUNAsU INOA SUIS n D SC gt a Q S a lt S5 O E KS e E Si E bei S 5 Se T S gt ep E a D Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller LAUX PEDAL jack Details on the pedal functions are listed here For functions indicated with use only the foot controller proper operation cannot be done with a footswitch Assignable Pedal Functions VOLUME Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume This function is available only for the pedal connected to the instrument s AUX PEDAL jack SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain When you press and hold the pedal all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain Releasing the pedal immedi ately stops damps any sustained notes SOSTENUTO Allows you to use the pedal as a sostenuto pedal In other words if you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note s the notes will sus tain as long as the pedal is held However all subsequent notes will not sustain This makes it possible to sustain a chord for example while other notes are played staccato SOFT GLIDE Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect Pressing this pedal reduces the vol ume and changes the timbre of the notes you play This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices When the pedal is pressed the
320. rmal Tremolo and Trill settings in the Harmony Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute Voices The Harmony function does not operate e Harmony cannot be used with the Al Fingered or Al Full Keyboard fingering modes Select an appropriate finger ing mode page 107 When a Voice is changed the previously selected effect is changed e Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on page 106 The Voice produces excessive noise e Certain Voices may produce noise depending on the Harmonic Content and or Brightness settings in the FIL TER page of the Mixing Console display page 90 The sound is distorted or noisy e The volume may be turned up too high Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate e This may be caused by certain effects Try canceling all unnecessary effects especially distortion type effects page 92 206 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual e Adjust the sound using the 8 A W TOTAL GAIN ADJ buttons from the display shown in step 6 of Editing and Saving the selected EQ page 95 if you are using the Master EQ e Some filter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display page 101 can result in distorted sound Adjust these settings if necessary e Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the Filter display of the Mixing Console Adjust the Har monic Content or Brightness controls
321. rument since you can enter each event manually E Style Assembly gt See page 122 This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various pat terns from the internal preset Styles For example if you want to create your own original 8 beat Style you could take rhythm patterns from the 70 s 8Beat Style use the bass pattern from 60 s Rock1 Style and import the chord patterns from the Cool8Beat Style combining the various elements to create one Style 70 s 8Beat Cool8Beat Rhythm 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Rhythm 2 60 s Rock1 Bass Bass Chord 1 Rhythm 1 Chord 1 Chord 2 Rhythm 2 Chord 2 Pad gt Bass Pad Phrase 1 Chord 1 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Chord 2 Phrase 2 z Pas Phrase 1 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Phrase 2 _ Kees Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Realtime Recording BASIC Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one by one using real time recording N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt e 5 ka o E D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob c lt 7 Realtime Recording Characteristics e Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a loop and Style recording is also done using loops For example if you start recordi
322. s 1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the USB TO DEVICE 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB lt gt MEDIA 3 Press the A B button to select the USB Tabs USB1 USB2 con nected to the devices in step 1 4 Press the H button to format the media UTILITY DEVICE LIST PROPERTY FORMAT c Initialize MEDIA All data will be leted SONG AUTO OPEN When the media is inserted to the device selected in the device list the first song in the media will be selectes lly automatically Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Saving Files This operation lets you save your original data such as Songs and Voices you ve created to a file 1 After you ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR or VOICE SET display press the SAVE display button The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears Keep in mind that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display VOICE SET GrandPianol HARMONIC CONTENT 0 DECAY 0 RELEASE 0 SPEED 0 DELAY 0 BRIGHTNESS 0 ATTACK 0 DEPTH 0 FILTER EG VIBRATO COM S LPARE SAVE VIBRATO SPEED DELAY FILTER EG BRIGHT HARMO ATTACK DECAY RELES DEPTH VOICE RIGHT1 VOICE ES L J ES Le Le Le B
323. s Speakers 16 cm 13 cm 2 5 cm 2 5 cm X 2 Speakers Transducer X 2 1465 mm X 1511 mm X 998 mm Dimensions W X D X H 57 7 8 X 59 1 2 X 39 3 8 Lid up 1476 mm X 1511 mm X 1703 mm 58 1 8 X 59 1 2 X 67 1 16 Weight 187 Kg 412 Ibs 4 oz Headphones HPE 160 Footswitch FC 4 FC 5 Optional Accessories Foot Controller FC 7 USB FDD Unit UD FDO1 Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer xipuaddy CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 215 Ba D Cc bp bi CG ka Index Symbols AGB Kee iergendeen Al oriista Al FINGERED AI EULL KEYBOARD sisccccscccsecessecsasicevts cenasscsesorbesovieee 108 ANY KEY marierons a A A ETE ARABIC geit venessznens dE EE ae is ASSEMDIy isese iepursrpsrsizassssa ASSEMBLY Style AUGIO Recorder senar Dueira sein ieies rininis Auto Accompaniment Feature AUTO REVOICE SETUP sississsesssiscssacssescsssscessssssacveosiie s B BaGK Te EE BASS ussesgese BOOKMARK Brightness BEE mestaan a AEAEE EE C Chain Playback sessies surorii enaissi CHANNEL CHANNEL ON OFF Characters cccceceeeeeeeeeee CHORD EE CHORD DETECT asscssisssesass g
324. s o 2 1 Press the STYLE CONTROL COUNTRY button STYLE CONTROL OPOP amp ROCK BALLAD DANCE QSWING amp JAZZQ R amp B O COUNTRY O LATIN BALLROOM O TAINMENT O WORLD PIANIST II J JG FB Enabling tempo display above Style name You can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 2 2 Select the B 2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO button and use the 5 A W 6 A V buttons to switch the tempo dis play on off s ON Tempo is displayed above the Style name With the default settings the Display Style Tempo function is on e OFF Tempo is not displayed above the Style name CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 45 2 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Style CountryPop STYLE PRESET Go B NewCountry Bluegrass aa jr EasyCountry E IER Hoedown H Ee 370 schartCntry ki FolkPop E C3 lo EEN wf CountryBallad H IS CountryHits Se p CountryPop E _ Country PI CR v v v a a a E a a a DRIA The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name For details on the character istics see page 107 e When the 7 A REPERTOIRE button is pr
325. s of the web page Disconnected This appears when the instrument is not connected with the Internet When this message is displayed the web page cannot be seen Icon 1 is displayed Now opening web page The web page is being loaded Icon 2 flashes Web page has been displayed Loading of the web page is completed and the page is displayed completely SSL Icon 2 stops flashing When the displayed web page uses SSL icon 3 is dis SSL Secure Sockets Layer is an played and information is encrypted for communication industry standard method for protecting web communications Strength of the reception is displayed in 4 when connecting to the Internet by by using data encryption and wireless LAN When reception is weak move the instrument near the access other tools point to improve reception OUII U BY 0 AjJOaIIG BAOUIAR D ay BuI2auu0O7 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 179 Operations in the Special Website Ah CAUTION The purchased data will be lost if you turn the power to the instrument off during download em o C E o g E o E e gt Ka Q oO A bei gt O gt amp o lt oD C c oO o O 180 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Purchasing and Downloading Data You can purchase and download Song data for playback on this instrument and other types of data from the special website For details on purchasing and down loading da
326. s you to re select the Voices for each part When the Style channels are called up neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User Voices can be selected When the Song channels are called up User Voices cannot be selected wn oO 2 fo gt DD fe me uw me G o DD Z D o o 2 O G e o D for a Drum Kit Voice PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part channel VOLUME Determines the level of each part or channel giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts FILTER CGP 1000 Owner s Manual HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect page 101 for each part BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cutoff frequency page 101 TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next The Porta mento Time determines the pitch transition time Higher values result in a longer pitch change time Setting this to 0 results in no effect This parameter is available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono page 86 PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each keyboard part when a pedal is assigned to this function OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each keyboard part TUNING Determines the pitch of each keybo
327. siedeheggEdeee ed Synchro Start ege sss b sse Ee EN Synchro Start Style 2 eedtedegEeEEEEEN NEEN 218 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Synchro TEE Synchro Stop WINdOW sisiasssesivecssseveovesstonesseovescacassnseses Synthetic ivory KEYtOPs sensio ninrin Ka dE e SYSTEM WEE SYSTEM RESET eiestegeeetgseegde Gaessen AE deeg eer T Li RE 59 TALK SETTING Tap function 0 8 EEN e eegend Ce Threshold LES WEE TRANSMIT Transpose Le LEE U URP EE USB Audio Recorder USB TO DEVICE Terminal 2 ccsccscesscceccessasesssevccsecseass 195 RTE 26 V VUE e ME KAS etei NR Vocal CueTIME VOCAL HARMONY EDIT cscssnicessvecsensesszcessecerese VOGAL HARMONY TYPE srein dE VOICE sraide VOICE EFFECT Voice Program Change Number i VOICE SET sessstesssccssssssasdsaccesssntasoenssvssss codes rateio p ITER VOLATTACK sscscsssccsssicdscsscsasssncssonsescvanssessssdessessccsessees VOLVOICE wissessssccsa cn sasessetansvarsseneseasstiecssencesdeseaar ened se W VWERCKMEISTIER sisesiidiii cadences sesniovoaedesseacsicedtaeezsnteesteves Wireless Game Adaptor Wireless LANI ss issansssveseraieases Gscdevsavevsgevecersservneessrenisees For information on the panel controls see Panel Controls on page 12 For information on the jacks and connectors located on the bottom of the instrument see Using Your Instrument with Other Devices on page 189 For Internet related terms see
328. simply pressing the DIRECT ACCESS button then the EXIT button 64 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display There are two basic display types Main and Selection Here are explanations of each display segment and its basic operation Main Display The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the cur rently selected Voice and Style allowing you to see them at a single glance The Main display is the one you ll usually see when you play the keyboard SCH MAIN SEQ 173 TRANSPOSE 0 ES al 103 BAR 00l 1 Natural SE went 1 o ig GrandPianol f 5 Got LEET Live RIGHT GalaxyEP Ee Strings 4 4 103 STYLE ES Je 120 SONG Le Classic8Beat fei NowSonz CHORD E REGIST re CA NewBank BALANCI 85 100 00 Voice name e RIGHT 1 indicated at the right edge Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part page 79 e RIGHT 2 indicated at the right edge Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part page 79 e LEFT indicated at the right edge Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part page 79 When the Left Hold function is ON an H indication appears page 86 Pressing one of the A C and F H buttons calls up
329. sistant technology To use the performance assistant technology the Song must contain chord data If the Song contains this data the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not 1 select a Song page 35 In these example instructions we recommend that you use the Songs in the Sing a long folder 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt B SONG SETTING 3 Press the 8 A V button to turn the P A T Performance Assistant on CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 43 aE ee DS P 5 Play the keyboard The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords no matter what keys you play It even changes the sound according to the way you play Try playing in the three different ways below Playing the left and right hand together Playing the left and right hand together Playing the left hand and right hand method 1 method 2 alternately TLL Tell Tell STIP Play three notes at the Play several notes one after Play three notes at the same time with your the other with different fin same time with your right hand gers of your right hand right hand 6 Press the SONG STOP button to stop playback i 7 Press the 8 A V button to turn the P A T Performance Assistant off Playing Acco
330. splay are described separately below These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parame ters page 106 which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected PIANO This display is available only when the Natural piano Voice page 78 is selected TUNING CURVE KEY OFF SAMPLE Determines the tuning curve Select FLAT if you feel the tuning curve of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instru ments Voices STRETCH Tuning curve particularly for pianos FLAT Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range Adjusts the volume of the key off sound the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key SUSTAIN SAMPLE Adjusts the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal STRING RESONANCE Adjusts the depth of string resonance COMMON VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity velocity sensitivity or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength DEPTH Determines the velocity sensitivity or how much the level of the voice changes in response to your playing strength velocity OFFSET Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the actual velocity effect PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1 2 parts the R1 R2 parameter is available
331. ss the EXIT button Voice The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not sound e Check whether or not the selected part is turned on page 79 e To select the Voice for the right hand key range make sure the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 SPLIT LEFT buttons are off For the Voice to be layered in the right hand range press the PART ON OFF DUAL RIGHT2 button To select the Voice for the left hand key range press the PART ON OFF SPLIT LEFT button A strange flanging or doubling sound occurs The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played e The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to ON and both parts are set to play the same Voice Turn off the RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts The sound seems strange or different than expected when changing a rhythm Voice drum kit etc of the Style or Song from the Mixer e When changing the rhythm percussion Voices drum kits etc of the Style and Song from the VOICE parame ter the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound In the case of Song playback you can restore the original sound by returning to the begin ning of the Song and playing back from that point In the case of Style play you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again Tremolo Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute Voice e This is no
332. ssess eet Aessen ees Ze Live SFX LYRICS Lyrics M MGI pstaa eessen een eene 25 65 MAIN PICTURE ere 19 Master COMPIeSSOR giscciesielecs tactiesddngns dsucdde edisneeseszenst ves 97 MASTER TUNE MEAN TONE MEDIA s EE enee EE EEAO MELODIC MINOR Messa pE S nee ore are AE r E ed 63 MiCTOpNONE wes encssscnsssonseseedesanoveess onssvnnes sesstes EEN 54 MICROPHONE SETTING cisccscoscocsssessessaeseossocsonesseebsoses 170 MIDI a MID EH EES sees teesees eege MIDI erugeet eegen green diene EE gie MIXING CONSOLE MONO POLY MULTI FINGER M lti track recording s s2sss isesessesenassntsacerdoedoceranenadessbes Music Finder Musie EE N NAME Natural Ile Ee O One Touch Setting One Handed Practice Opam LURES iriser ian oa E deed OleannFlUtes csser aniei E REO 78 D E AEE ETE A E A 185 OTS EINK seco EE OTS Link Timing OVERALL SETTING essdcsteadescnccecasspartesescnadestendssassiea coins 171 OWNER eseu 18 19 20 Owner Name P PEDAL pedal polarity pedals PENGUSSI ON SOUS EE performance assistant technology Phrase Mark PHRASE MARK REPEAT Pianist PIANO Piano Lock Neit ut EE Portamento Time Practice Function PRESET vss Pro PROPERTY Prot 1 Prot 2 Edit NL Punch In Out Recording 5 PURE MAJOR EE 85 PURE MINOR PYTHAGOREAN CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 217 xipuaddy Ray D Cc bp om S lt Q QUANTIZE eine Sieg Quick Record
333. t T O v E S Cp Z 5 8 D c V Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet The special website can be opened when directly connect ing the Clavinova to the Internet Depending on the Internet con nection you may not be able to connect to two or more devices for example a computer and the instrument depending on the contract with the provider This means you cannot connect with the Clavinova If in doubt check your contract or contact your provider Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port Some types of modems require an optional hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices such as com puter musical instrument etc Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port A USB wireless LAN adaptor also can be used 176 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual You can purchase and download Song data and other types of data from the spe cial Clavinova website by directly connecting the instrument to the Internet This section contains terms related to computers and online communications If there are some terms you are unfamiliar with refer to the Internet Glossary page 188 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet You can connect the instrument to a full time online connection ADSL optical fiber cable Internet etc via a router or a modem equipped with a router For specific instructions on connecting as well as information on compatible LAN adaptors rout ers etc refer to the Yama
334. t gt LJ Le ES ABBE 3 H Le z Selecting a Picture for the Main Display Back ground This function lets you select your favorite picture to be used as background for the Main display page 25 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY gt TAB lt gt OWNER 2 Press the J MAIN PICTURE button to call up the Picture Selection Display 3 Use the A J buttons to select a picture UTILITY 1 LANGUAGE ENGLISH MAIN PICTURE Default CC Co eI Cc gt Cy Bac VARI S NAME VERSION Wi Monochrome2 a 2 Co BS IS Bubble l Monochrome3 3 j Co E Cell IR Monochrome4 co 4 3 i Co ES Mica E Monochrome5 CO E CH EC 7 ll Monochrome1 l E Monochrome6 I SYSTEM wy CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 19 Display Settings The explanation about picture compatibility at right applies also to the background of the Song Lyrics display E fe 5 Q fe 5 20 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual After selecting press the DIRECT ACCESS button then press the EXIT button to return to the Main display The newly selected picture is shown as the background of the Main display Importing a favorite picture for the Main display background Even though a variety of pictures are available on the Preset drive you can load your own favorite picture data from USB storage device USB flash
335. t Style playback know how into a single unified format By using the Style Creator you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own Styles The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the Style is played back This does not apply to the rhythm track These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature e Source Pattern There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback notes depending on the particular root note and chord type that are selected The Style data is appropriately con verted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance This basic Style data that you create with the Style Creator is referred to as the Source Pat tern e Note Transposition This parameter group features two parameters that deter mine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be con verted in response to chord changes e Other Settings Using the parameters of this group you can fine tune how Style playback responds to the chords you play For exam ple the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shift ing the pitch to an authentic range ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instru ment e g very low notes of a piccolo sound The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of Basic Operation for Editing Styles page 123 Press the A B
336. t are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument e Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it e Use only the supplied power cord plug e Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it Do not open e Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way The instrument contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel N CAUTION Water warning e Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands Fire warning e Do not put burning items such as candles on the unit A burning item may fall over and cause a fire If you notice any abnormality e f the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or smoke sh
337. t is an electronic instrument that can han dle 16 MIDI channels or reception of 32 channels for MIDI data reception when using the USB terminal This is usually expressed as it can play 16 instruments at the same time Channel messages transmit informa tion such as Note ON OFF Program Change for each of the 16 channels CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 197 s 214 q JAYIO YUM JUatUNAsU INOA SUIS Kai EU D gt Q Q i Q Ss ES O Me 3 D i E Q E 3 E 5 N 3 gt D I E o What is MIDI Message Name Operation Panel Setting Note ON OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each mes sage includes a specific note num ber which corresponds to the key which is pressed plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played Program Change For selecting Voices with control change bank select MSB LSB set tings Control Change Volume panpot Mixing Console etc 2 NOTE The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI data MIDI Channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels Using these channels 1 16 the perfor mance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously fr
338. t neces sary when using the Wireless Game Adaptor oo IibisiUN e SSID 0 S SI D Channel chi0 Encryption Off C h ann el Hexadecimal eo 5 64bit 5 Encryption WEP key type WEP key length WEP key CANCEL Oh Wireless Networks Determines whether or not Wireless Networks are displayed SSID Determines the SSID setting Channel Determines the channel O Encryption Determines whether or not the data is encrypted WEP key type WEP key length WEP key These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled These set the type and length of the encryption key Others INTERNET SETTING LAN WIRELESS LAN OTHERS Proxy server Proxy port Non proxy server Delete cookies Delete all bookmarks Initialize setup Initialize J Display Information Connect information Proxy server Proxy port Non proxy server Determines the proxy server name port number and the host name for the non proxy server The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server When using a non proxy server enter a separator comma between each server name Delete cookies Deletes the information of all saved cookies Delete all bookmarks Deletes all saved bookmarks Initialize setup Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults See Initializ ing Internet Settings on p
339. t the note for tuning 2 Use the 4A W 5 A V buttons to set the tuning in cents e Determines the base note for each scale Press the 2 A W button to select the base note When the base note is changed the pitch of the keyboard is transposed yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes Preset Scale Types EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts with TEMPERAMENT each half step evenly spaced in pitch This is the most commonly used tuning in music today PURE MAJOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale PURE MINOR especially for triad chords root third fifth You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies such as choirs and a cappella singing PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths which are collapsed into a single octave The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads MEAN TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale by making the major third interval more in tune It was especially popu lar from the 16th century to the 18th century Handel among others used this scale WERCKMEISTER KIRNBERGER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger sys tems which were themselves improvements on the mean tone and Pythagorean scales The main feat
340. t to ON and if chord data exists in the song the mode is automatically set to CHORDAL In all other cases the mode is set to VOCODER VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard and or song data You can specify whether the Vocoder effect is controlled by your keyboard performance or by the Song data page 172 CHORDAL The harmony notes are determined by the following three types of chord chords played in the chord section of the keyboard with the ACMP turned on chords played in the LEFT Voice section of the keyboard with the ACMP turned off and the LEFT turned on and chords contained in song data for control ling the harmony Not available if the song does not contain any chord data e CHORD The following parameters determine which data in a recorded song is used for chord detection OFF Chords are not detected from the song data XF Chords of XF format are used for the Vocal Harmony 1 16 Chords are detected from note data in the specified song chan nel e Vocal Range Set this to obtain the most natural vocal harmony depending on your voice Normal Normal setting Low Setting for lower voice This setting is also appropriate for growl ing and shouting High Setting for higher voice This setting is also appropriate for sing ing close to the microphone E MIC The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled e MUTE Wh
341. t to play back only one particular channel muting all other chan nels press and hold down one of the 1 A W 8 A W buttons corresponding to the desired channel To cancel solo playback press the same button again Recording Your Performance You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a USB storage device Several different recording methods are available Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple channels and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one You can also edit the Songs you ve recorded For details on MIDI Recording see page 196 For details on USB Audio Recording see page 60 Recording Methods There are three methods as shown below Quick Recording This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly gt page 144 record your performance useful for example in recording solo piano pieces You can record to the TRACK 1 R or TRACK 2 L button and also to the EXTRA TRACKS STYLE track which can be used for recording at the same time Multi track Recording This lets you record a whole Song including several different gt page 145 instrument parts to create the sound of a full band or orchestra Record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated compositions You can also record over already recorde
342. ta refer to the instructions on the site itself Operation after purchase and download When downloading is completed a message appears asking you whether or not to open the File Selection display Select YES to call up the File Selection display from which you can select the downloaded data To return to the Internet display select NO When the File Selection display is open press the 8 A UP button to call up the next highest level folder Download Destination The download destination depends on the use of storage media as described below e When a USB storage device is connected to the instrument during pur chase The downloaded data is saved in the MyDownloads folder in the USB tab display of the File Selection display To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder press the 8 A UP button in the File Selection display e When a USB storage device is not connected to the instrument during pur chase The downloaded data is saved in the MyDownloads folder in the User tab display of the File Selection display To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder press the 8 A UP button in the File Selection display Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages You can bookmark the page you re viewing and set up a custom link so the page can be instantly called up in the future With the desired page currently selected press the 44 W BOOK MARK button The B
343. tailed operations and functions related to Song playback which are not covered in the Quick Guide E Starting Stopping a Song Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start Song playback and press the SONG STOP button to stop In addition there are several other convenient ways to start stop a Song Starting Playback Synchro Start You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard While playback is stopped simultaneously press the SONG STOP and PLAY PAUSE buttons simultaneously To cancel the Synchro Start function simultaneously press the SONG STOP and PLAY PAUSE buttons simultaneously once again e Tap function This useful function lets you press the TAP TEMPO button to tap out the tempo and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed Simply tap press release the button four times for a 4 4 time signature while the instrument is in Synchro Start standby mode and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped Fade In The Fade In function can be used to produce smooth fade ins when starting the Song To produce fade ins press the foot pedal which is assigned to Fade In Out while playback is stopped and then press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to start playback For information on the settings see page 191 Stopping Playback Fade Out The Fade Out function can be used to produce smooth fade outs when stopping the Song playback Press the foot pedal which is assigned
344. tant Selection of the Displays Direct Access With the convenient Direct Access function you can instantly call up the desired display with just a single additional button press Press the DIRECT ACCESS button A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button 2 Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display Refer to the separate Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function Example of calling up the Guide function display Press the DIRECT ACCESS button then press the GUIDE button G P 5 ow 2 2 O vu o a o Natural en ams _ 8 Pressing a button on the panel or pedal jumps to the relevant setup page of the respective button or pedal The button or a pedal works as a shortcut key Press EXIT to return to the MAIN display DIRECT ACCESS a ae 5 BALANCE e100 SECY 85 100 100 100 re MIC LEFT RIGHT RIGHT2 ERE OGUIDE OREPEAT CO FS Co 2 GUIDE MODE mH Guide lamp indicates the next note to play A Playback pauses until you play the correct note v GUIDE LAMP NGLE AL eee REPEAT MODE CUTTING be ON ee TIMING TE CHANNEL SETTING AUTO LYRICS QUICK TRACK2 TRACKI CHSET LANGUAGE START PAT Returning to the Main display You can conveniently return to the Main display from any other display by
345. tep 2 select the CMP tab A Use the A B buttons to select a preset Master Compressor type Selecting a Master Compressor type automatically sets the parameters at the bottom of the display to the optimum values for the type MIXING CONSOLE VOL VOICE V FILTER TUNE EFFECT MASTER COMPRESSOR Sa010A Supp pue Buea 2Zutsn E CT THRESHOLD GAIN OFFSET PE OFFSET LOW MID HIG 5 Press the F button to set the Master Compressor to ON If you want to edit the Master Compressor parameters go on to the next operation CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 97 wn o 2 5 gt DD C E ke Lu a E bd oD E Ke be o 2 O o E T 98 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Threshold Determines the minimum level at which compression starts The compressor affects only the sound of levels higher than that of Threshold E Editing and Saving the selected Master Compressor 6 Use the 1 A W 2A V buttons to select the frequency curve for the Compressor or which frequencies compression is applied to For example select LOW when you want to emphasize low frequencies and HIGH when you want to emphasize high frequencies MIXING CONSOLE L VOICE FILTER MASTER COMPRESSOR n J00 H THRESHOLD GAIN OFFSET OFFSET LOW MID HIGH i BASIC TYPE fit
346. terminal and connection to the MIDI terminal e Connecting to the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the instrument to the computer via USB use a standard USB cable having the USB logo to connect the USB TO HOST terminal on the instrument to the USB terminal of the computer Then install the USB MIDI driver USB cable E T MAA A cs Instrument SS ke k 194 CGP 1000 Owners Manual Hi About the USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction Expla nations on the USB TO DEVICE terminal follow in the next section Z CAUTION Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST termi nal make sure to observe the following points Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data If the computer or the instrument freezes turn the power to the instrument off and restart the computer e Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST ter minal exit from any power saving mode of the computer such as suspended sleep standby and quit any open appli cation software also turns off the power to the instrument Execute the fol
347. th Format 0 and Format 1 e Song data recorded on the CGP 1000 is automati cally saved as SMF Format 0 ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the Clavinova series instruments This is a common format used with various Yamaha software e The CGP 1000 is compatible with ESEQ What You Can Do With MIDI XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF Standard MIDI File standard with greater functionality and open ended expandability for the future The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files The instrument is compat ible with SMF Formats 0 and 1 and records song data using SMF Format 0 Style File The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha s auto accompaniment know how into a single unified format Voice Allocation Format With MIDI Voices are assigned to specific numbers called program numbers The numbering standard order of voice allocation is referred to as the voice allocation format Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback The instru ment is compatible with the following formats 2 NOTE Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above the data may still not be completely compatible depending on t
348. th the exception of the points listed below e In the Song Creator the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Style Creator it cannot be changed This is because the length of the Style is automati cally fixed depending on the selected section For example if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length the End Mark position is automati cally set to the end of the fourth measure and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 121 N Q gt E A o E o jon E e O O lt e 5 ka o E D ES CO De CO c o0 a Ka oO L O ob c lt 7 Style Creator You cannot select the SECTION INTRO 4 ENDING 4 directly via the panel operation Ah CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation page 69 e Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1 16 tab display how ever they cannot be changed in the Style Creator Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display e In the Style Creator the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited delete copy or move You can switch between the two by pressing the F button However Chord Lyrics and System Exclusive data cannot be entered Style Assembly ASSEMBLY Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various
349. the Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 148 5 a eee 1 4 6 7 The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers In this example keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the entire operations Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display Press the H button to select Normal SONG CREATOR NewSong STEP RECORD aia 1920PPQ CH Je B Tel c E dal BAR BEAT CLOCK Siei eee L Le 2 Press the I button to select normal note type OO Press the 7 A W button to select the eighth note A While holding C3 key on the keyboard press the 7 A W button Do not release the C3 key yet Keep holding it while executing the following steps 5 8 9 While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard press the 7 A V button Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet Keep holding them while executing the following steps BAR BEAT CLOCK P x AA annA F CDE While holding the C3 E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard press the 7 A V button Do not release the C3 E3 and G3 keys yet Keep holding
350. the 5 A W button to select the dotted half note length Play the A3 key on the keyboard as specified in the example Press the I button to select normal note type Press the 6 A W button to select the quarter note length Play the F3 key on the keyboard as specified in the example Press the SONG STOP button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE REW FF O REC STOP PLAY PAUSE REW FF C Sec IESSE gt C C econ es NEW SYNC START NEW SONG SYN 17 18 Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display You can also edit the Songs you ve recorded as necessary page 158 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 Ah CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 153 Recording Your Performance s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO L O ob Z D D Recording Your Performance About the items which can be selected via the G H I but tons See page 151 154 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Example 3 The explanations here apply to step 7 of
351. the Yamaha site SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection Commu nication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large scale network into several smaller networks URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet A complete URL usually starts with the characters http Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless cable free connection Wireless Game Adaptor Wireless Ethernet Converter or Bridge Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices printers and game machines etc equipped with LAN ports 188 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Ab CAUTION Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power of all the components Also before turning any components on or off make sure to set all volume levels to minimum 0 Otherwise elec trical shock or damage to the components may occur O O INPUT MIC VOLUME LINE In MIC Using
352. them while exe cuting the following steps BAR BEAT CLOCK e a Sea J IER A While holding the C3 E3 G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard press the 7 A V button and successively press the 5 A W button After you press the 5 A W button release the keys s EZ a J Pe Pe TY SE P Press the SONG STOP button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song Press the SONG PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes 1 O Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display If you want you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner page 158 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 69 Recording Your Performance A CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 69 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 155 s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter Recording Your Performance Recording Chords You can record Chords and Sections Intro Main Ending and so on one at a time with precise timing These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function The explanations here apply to step 7 of the
353. tion File Folder Operations NIK GL FINGERED E FINGERED ON BASS tued cess cosas asuisi naea Flash Memory FOLDER sirenen get geed Suna AE Eed R Folder aeaee dee een Follow Nights ett cones caves ves Ode deeg FOOU GONION EL serisidir aeren neea i sche FOOTAGE FOOUARC cessscssssesssscosssasasncsssssicovssatessscnscsoas SSE EE SREE FOOTSWITCIN e esee reeeo r eo Re AERTS teg ET Format FREEZE For information on the panel controls see Panel Controls on page 12 For information on the jacks and connectors located on the bottom of the instrument see Using Your Instrument with Other Devices on page 189 For Internet related terms see Glossary of Internet Terms on page 188 For information on the parameters in the tab dis plays refer to the tab names in this index F nction display ssitessccsssies soncssssccaescacsscadencoseoses Esr 27 G GM System Level 1 GM System Level 2 GROOVE CS E EIER Guide Lamp GUIDE LAMP ON OFF GUIDE LAMP TIMING HARMONY EE HARMONY ECHO Headphone Hanger Headphones ossessi Home Page ICON MIC EE 74 Initializing Internet Settings Internet Direct Connection Internet Settings sei escesssscssseachecesheceschesuer eE 183 K Karaoke soyaga E EE Karaoke serepiesimoe nener eair I dee key cover Keyboard Parts KEYBOARD PANEL KIRNBERGER L LAN LAN port Language beft eer ege Left Pedal IIE o A E A EAEE P EEA TA E E Live a
354. tionally convenient tool for learning and L practicing pieces Guide Lamps wvascicsissasiesessccccssescessessiecesessacscasasecscdsascansdsacssasicneceaas page 39 The key guide lamps are also helpful in learning and practicing since they O GUIDE indicate the notes you should play when you should play them and how long you should hold them down Recording Your Performance csccccsssscesssssressessessesseeeeees page 42 The instrument lets you easily record your own performance and save it to inte OPEC nal memory or a USB storage device This too is an excellent practice tool let ting you listen back to your playing and spot your strong and weak points Expand Your Song Collection Internet Direct Connection sssseesseesssseerssseeeseseeeseeesssseeeses page 176 The instrument also connects directly to the Internet letting you download Song data from special websites and save them to internal memory or a USB storage device INTERNET CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 11 Introduction 12 Panel Controls z9 e MASTER VOLUME Demo METRONOME STYLE CONTROL O mauer INTRO kb TEMPO TEMPO ei oO a e ON OFF TRANSPOSE QPOPAROCK O BALLAD DANCE OSWINGAJAZZO RAB COUNTRY O LATIN _ OBALLROOM O V OQ WORLD o ei E 2 oo cs
355. to matically saved to the instru ment when you exit from this display However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings will be lost Returning to the first Sequence in one action In the Main display press the TAB lt 4 and gt buttons simul taneously This cancels the cur rently selected Sequence number the box indicator at the top right goes out The first Sequence will be selected by pressing one of the TAB lt 4 gt buttons or by pressing the pedal Ahh CAUTION Keep in mind that all Registra tion Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks unless you ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank file CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 135 sdnjas jaueg Wojsny Buey pue BulJa si3ay L 00 be Do DD f me fe me fe bd DD Le be oO L O ob Z D D Using Creating and Editing Songs Before using a USB storage device be sure to read Han dling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc on page 22 Before using a floppy disk and the disk slot be sure to read Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks on page 21 Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws Copying com mercially available data is strictly prohibited except for your own personal use See page 199 for information on the types of Song data that can be played on the instrume
356. to select the edit menu page 125 STYLE CREATOR Classic8Beat ASSEMBLY Y GROOVE 1 GROOVE 2 DYNAMICS B CI y Groove lets you change the swing feel of the rhythm fl for example from 8 beat to shuffle 3 ZG BEAT ORIGINAL BEAT CONVERTER SWING I 2 Use the 1 A W 8 A W buttons to edit the data For details on editable parameters see page 125 3 Press the D EXECUTE button to actually enter the edits for each display After the operation is completed you can execute the edition and this but ton changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone A Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data Save the data in the Style Selection display page 69 E GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the feel of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing clock of the Style The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied In other words if 8 Beat is selected Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes if 12 Beat is selected Groove timing is applied to 8th
357. tsn Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard The instrument features a sophisticated multi processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound wn oO 2 fo gt DD fe me uw me G o DD Z D o o 2 O G e o D You can use a pedal to turn the Harmony Echo effects on and off page 191 Portamento Portamento is a function that cre ates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next The porta mento time the pitch transition time can be set via the MIXING CONSOLE display page 90 DSP Stands for Digital Signal Proces sor or Processing DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of effects 86 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 2 3 4 Call up the operation display DIRECT ACCESS EXIT Select the desired part for which you want to add effects by pressing one of the A C F H buttons MAIN J 103 TRANSPOSE Natural b GrandPianol f T Coot GalaxyEP m i mm Classic amp 8Beat CHORD LEET STYLE OI NewBank 5 B AL ANCE SS 85 100 100 100 a p SONG STYLE MIC LEET _ RIGHT1__RIGHT2 Press the VOICE EFFECT button to call up the VOICE EFFECT display HARMONY ECHO ON 1 LEFT HOLD OFF TYPE STANDARD TRIO MONO POLY POLY DSP ON
358. tual velocity you play the keyboard with fff 127 ff 111 f 95 mf 79 mp 63 p 47 pp 31 Ppp 15 H button Determines the gate time note length of the note to be entered Items Gate time to be recorded Normal 80 Tenuto 99 40 20 The gate time note length can be set to any desired percentage by using the DATA ENTRY dial Staccato a ee Oo Staccatissimo Manual I button Determines the note type to be entered Pressing the button alternately switches the note selectors at the bottom of the display among three basic note values normal dotted and triplet Recording Your Performance About velocity Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard The more strongly you play the keyboard the higher the velocity value and the louder the sound The velocity value can be speci fied within a range from 1 to 127 The higher the velocity value the louder the sound becomes CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 151 s8uos sunipy pue Bunea Suter L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO L O ob Z D D Recording Your Performance About the items which can be selected via the G H I but tons See page 151 152 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual The explanations here apply to step 7 of the Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 148 mp tS The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the f
359. tyle Creator You can create your own Styles recording them by yourself or by combining the internal Style data The created Styles can be edited s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Buea Suen Style Structure Styles are made up of fifteen different sections and each section has eight separate channels With the Style Creator feature you can create a Style by separately recording the channels or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles Style Section MAIN VARIATION O ie Four different Fill ins are c available t Ji Channel CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 117 Style Creator Creating a Style You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style The created Styles can also be edited page 123 E Realtime Recording gt See page 118 This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument You can select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want to create and then re record parts of the Style as desired or you can create a new Style from scratch E Step Recording gt See page 121 This method is like writing music notation on paper since it allows you to enter each note or individually and specify its length This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the inst
360. ugh the sequence Use the D button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence LD amp p Z 2 N T S a z 8 wn O op T O bg D a c o op C g E Sp E D A Use the E button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence SEQUENCE END STOP ausesitstesausevettis Pressing the TAB b gt button or the advance pedal has no effect The sequence is stopped TOP EE The sequence starts again at the beginning NEXT BANK The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder 5 Program the Sequence order The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REG ISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons on the panel Program the Sequence order from left to right 134 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 button on the panel then press the 6 A W INSERT button to input the number e Replacing the number Press the 5 A W REPLACE button to replace the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number e Deleting the number Press the 7 A W DELETE button to delete the number at the cursor position e Deleting all numbers Press the 8 A W CLEAR button to delete all numbers in the sequence Ox Press the F button to turn the Registration Sequence function on N
361. ure of this scale is that each key has its own unique character The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven and even now it is often used when per forming period music on the harpsichord ARABIC Use these tunings when playing Arabic music Tuning values for Preset Scales base note C in cents C CH D Eb E F F G Ab A Bb B SCC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PURE MAJOR o 29 7 3 9 15 6 14 1 2 3 9 4 2 3 27 3 15 6 18 0 11 7 PURE MINOR o 33 6 3 9 15 6 14 1 2 3 31 3 2 3 14 1 15 6 18 0 11 7 PYTHAGOREAN o 14 1 3 9 6 3 7 8 2 3 11 7 2 3 15 6 63 3 9 10 2 MEAN TONE o 24 2 7 0 10 2 14 1 3 1 20 3 3 1 273 102 7 0 17 2 WERCKMEISTER o 10 2 7 8 6 3 10 2 2 3 11 7 3 9 7 8 11 7 3 9 7 8 KIRNBERGER o 10 2 7 0 6 3 14 1 2 3 10 2 3 1 7 8 10 2 3 9 11 7 ARABIC 1 0 o 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Ianni 0 0 ARABIC 2 o 0 0 o Ianni 0 0 0 0 0 o 50 0 In the display the rounded off value is shown Changing Pitch Cent In musical terms a cent is 1 100th of a semitone 100 cents equal one semitone Instantly recalling the desired scale Register the desired scale to the Registration Memory Be sure to checkmark the SCALE item when registering page 131 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 85 Sad10A Supp pue Buea 2Zu
362. us appear on the LCD display of this instrument indicating the functions and opera tions Throughout this manual arrows are used in the instructions indicating in shorthand the process of calling up these functions The example shorthand below describes a four step operation 1 press the FUNCTION button 2 press the D button to select the Controller page 3 press the TAB gt button to select the Keyboard Panel page and 4 press the A button to select the Initial Touch parameter FUNCTION gt D CONTROLLER TAB gt KEYBOARD PANEL gt A 1 INITIAL TOUCH CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard E 86 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE En 88 Basie Proced rE siseses eeii 88 Voice Creating Voice Set REENEN 99 Basic Procedure seiscscesiescsesscersacesevensesaesd sirian 99 Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices 103 Using Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 107 Style Characteristics ee 107 Selecting a Chord Fingering Type 107 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a SUE vveseienssccendeceendosenesesscsecdassceddvassdendesdendegecsaes 108 Style Playback related Settings een 109 Split Point Setting cece eesseseseeeeeeeseeees 111 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style MIXING CONSOLE une 112 Convenient Music Finder feature 112 Searching the Records ccesssceeeeseree
363. usic Korea Ltd 8F 9F Dongsung Bldg 158 9 Samsung Dong Kangnam Gu Seoul Korea Tel 080 004 0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Papapa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10
364. v e E gt Ka O D el bal gt O E gt T O v E S Cp C 5 8 D O O Operations in the Special Website Editing Bookmarks From the Bookmark display you can change the names and rearrange the order of your bookmarks as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list BOOKMARK LIST Yamaha Website 1 PAGE TITLE KEIER OA g Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list View Opens the web page of the selected bookmark Add Used when registering a bookmark page 180 Move Changes the order of the bookmarks 1 Select the bookmark you wish to move then press the 4A el MOVE button The lower part of the display changes letting you select the new posi tion for the bookmark 2 Select the intended position by pressing the 1A V A V button 3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the 7 A V EXECUTE button Changing names Changes the name of the selected bookmark Pressing the 5 A Y CHANGE but ton calls up the display for entering characters For details on entering characters see page 73 Delete Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list Close Closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display 182 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Operations in the Special Website About the Internet Settings Display From
365. ve control among electronic digi tal music instruments and other devices To get a better idea of what MIDI does let s first consider acoustic instruments such as a grand piano and a classical gui tar With the piano you strike a key and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note With the gui tar you directly pluck a string and the note sounds But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note pro duction 7 Internal amp Tasen Electric circuit W Si Playing the key board Based on playing information from the keyboard a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound As shown in the illustration above in an electronic instrument the sampling note previously recorded note stored in the tone generator section electronic circuit is played based on information received from the keyboard Now let s examine what happens when we playback a recording When you play back a music CD for exam ple a solo piano recording you re hearing the actual sound vibration in air of the acoustic instrument This Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument audio data Recording Playback In the above example the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist s performance are captured in the recording as audio data and this is record
366. ved by pressing the USB Call up the Style Creator Edit display by pressing the B button USER buttons USB USER B STYLE gt Press the TAB lt gt button to select a tab de e Changing the Rhythmic Feel GROOVE gt See page 124 These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created Style e Editing Data for each Channel CHANNEL gt See page 126 The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize set tings for each channel in the Style data e Making Style File Format Settings PARAMETER gt See page 127 For playback of your created Style you can decide how notes will be con verted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the chord section of the keyboard s J 5 JuauUuedWosoYy ony y Sun pue Bunea Suen 5 Edit the selected Style CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 123 N Q gt E A o E o jon E O O O lt e 5 ka o E S D ES CH De CO c S D E Ka oO L O ob E lt 7 Style Creator Ah CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation page 69 124 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Changing the Rhythmic Feel GROOVE The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of Basic Operation for Editing Styles page 123 Press the A B button
367. when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part the LEFT parameter is available MONO POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically page 86 PORTAMENTO TIME Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to MONO above CONTROLLER 1 MODULATION When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION the pedal can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch vibrato Here you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cut off Frequency For details about the filter see page 101 AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude volume LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch or the vibrato effect LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modulation or the wah effect LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude or the tremolo effect 2 LEFT PEDAL This allows you to select the function to be assigned to the left pedal FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the left pedal For details on the pedal functions see page 191 2 A W 8 A V but tons RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 LEFT etc SOUND FILTER Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the respective keyboa
368. wn on the 1 16 tab display Note The individual note of a Song Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played and the gate time value the length of a note Ctrl Control Change Settings to control the Voice such as volume pan filter and effect depth edited via the Mixing Console described on page 88 etc Prog MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice Program Change P Bnd Pitch Bend Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously A T Aftertouch This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key L 00 be wv DD f me fe me fe o DD Le oO L O ob Z D D after the note is played Event types shown on the CHORD tab display Style Style Tempo tempo Chord chord root chord type on bass chord Sect Accompaniment Style Section Intro Main Fill In Break Ending OnOff On off status for each part channel of the Accompaniment Style CH Vol Volume for each part channel of the Accompaniment Style S Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style 164 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Displaying Specific Types of Events FILTER In the edit displays various types of events are shown It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit This is where the Filter function comes in handy It lets you determine which event t
369. written note of the settings here in case you have to enter them again INTERNET SETTING BROWSER LAN nmn gestan OTHERS Use DHCP IP address 0 0 0 0 eo Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway DNS server DNS server2 IP address Subnet mask CONTROL MENU Zom Gateway Use DHCP Determines whether or not DHCP is used If your router is compatible with DHCP select ON DNS server 1 DNS server 2 These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers These settings must be made when Use DHCP above is set to ON set DNS manu ally or OFF IP address Subnet mask Gateway These settings are available only when DHCP is not used The settings here are IP address subnet mask and gateway server address These settings must be made when Use DHCP above is set to OFF pen D C D g v e E gt Ka O D el oO gt O E gt ae V v E 20 C 5 8 D O O 184 CGP 1000 Owner s Manual Wireless LAN These settings here are only necessary when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor For a wireless LAN setup make sure to set both the LAN settings page 184 and the Wireless LAN settings below INTERNET SETTING LAN Make a written note of the settings here in y_srowser W case you have to enter them again Operations in the Special Website The settings at left are no
370. xplanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of Realtime L Sen scht E 5 Recording page 119 a STYLE CREATOR a Di 4 4 1920PPQ 5 1 EE ES CT F OO 001 1 0000 Note CH 80 0000 0020 Di vn _001 1 0000 Note FAL 80 0000 0020 D a LY 001 1 0960 Note Foi 40 0000 0020 FA 001 2 0000 Note cn 127 0000 0020 i CO 001 2 0000 Note Fei 80 0000 0020 001 2 0960 Note Di 60 0000 0020 5 001 2 0960 Note FAL 40 0000 0020 E 001 3 0000 Note Ci 80 0000 0020 eg ben J p _001 3 0000 Note Fat 80 0000 0020 D 001 3 0960 Note FAL 40 0000 0020 zZ 001 4 0000 Note cn 127 0000 0020 E BAR BEAT_ CLOCK gt DATA ENTRY a EC cur cory DESS Gei Sen a OWS Dee Gee S O D 3 VTA a al gt y nQ STYLE CREATOR Classic8Beat EI STEP RECORD 4 4 1920PPQ be A 001 1 0000 Prog 83 ba L 001 1 0000 Note ci 80 0000 0020 vn _001 1 0000 Note F 80 0000 0020 Y 001 1 0960 Note F 40 0000 0020 001 2 0000 Note cn 127 0000 0020 001 2 0000 Note FAL 80 0000 0020 001 2 0960 Note Di 60 0000 0020 001 2 0960 Note FAL 40 0000 0020 001 3 0000 Note Gil 30 0000 0020 _001 3 0000 Note FA 80 0000 0020 001 3 0960 Note FAL 40 0000 0020 001 4 0000 Note cn 127 0000 0020 BAR BEAT CLOCK Sea In the EDIT display you can record notes with absolutely precise timing This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording page 121 wi
371. y 63 Instant Selection of the Displays Direct ACCESS cccssccsssesssssesssoscsesccccccescecescces 64 Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection RIDE A 65 Main Display oo eege EE 65 File Selection Display Configuration and Basic OPGrFAblOn secerni anien ss eiss rensei 66 File Folder Operations in the File Selection RIDE 68 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings 74 Restoring the Factory programmed System 74 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Independently by Item cceeeeceseeeeeseeseeeeees 75 Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single TE 75 Data Backup ccsccsscisssssssssscesscocssoscescecccesacesences 76 Backup Procedure isis esses suscesiensdsestesasesssesaeventvoseess 77 Reference Using Creating and Editing Voices 78 Voice Characteristics cccccessesseeesesesees 78 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously 79 Keyboard Parts Right 1 Right 2 Left 79 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Right Tand La ME 80 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 and Left Barten 81 Enhancing the Acoustic Realism of the Sound AFC E cecscecadscectccedsssssdsssssesess 82 Adjusting the AFC Depth oe eeeeeeeeeeeees 82 Changing Pitch sessies gene etged ugoe 84 IMANS POSE EE 84 Fine tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument 84 Scale TUNING c iccsiectcseucssaciveisteessascdunasoats cotsiaedssersas 84 Various display pages and men
372. y Buffy Sainte Marie and Jack Nitzsche Copyright 1982 by Famous Music Corporation and Ensign Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Waltz For Debby Lyric by Gene Lees Music by Bill Evans TRO Copyright 1964 Renewed 1965 Renewed 1966 Renewed Folkways Music Publishers Inc New York NY International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Including Public Performance For Profit Used by Permission White Christmas from the Motion Picture Irving Berlin s HOLIDAY INN Words and Music by Irving Berlin Copyright 1940 1942 by Irving Berlin Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved A Whole New World from Walt Disney s ALADDIN Music by Alan Menken Lyrics by Tim Rice 1992 Wonderland Music Company Inc and Walt Disney Music Company All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Yesterday Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright 1965 Sony ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony ATV Music Publishing 8 Music Square West Nashville TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved You Are The Sunshine Of My Life Words and Music by Stevie Wonder 1972 Renewed 2000 JOBETE MUSIC CO INC and BLACK BULL MUSIC c o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Per mission You Sexy Thing Words and Music by E Brown Copyright 1975 by Finchley Music C
373. y connected tone generators with your feet especially convenient for playing single note bass parts This template lets you play control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received CGP 1000 Owner s Manual 201 SODIAVQ JAYIO YUM JUatuNssU INOA SUIS Kai EU 2 gt ov Q o Ss zi O E 3 D i E o E 5 N E 3 gt D I E o MIDI Settings SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 200 CLOCK INTERNAL TRANSMIT CLOCK OFF __ ___ RECEIVE TRANSPOSE OFF START STOP SONG v S 5 MESSAGE SW SYS EX Tx ON Rx ON CHORD SYS EX Tx ON Rx ON SONG STYLE LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT2 E LOCAL CONTROL Turns the Local Control for each part on or off When Local Control is set to ON the keyboard of the instru ment controls its own local internal tone generator allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard If you set Local to OFF the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instru ment s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers For example this all
374. y reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data Normally these parts are not used by the instrument itself The instrument can be used as a 32 channel multi timbral tone generator by using these five parts in addition to the general parts except for the microphone sound MIDI Settings Rx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel 1 16 flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel s BECH Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 132 WR MIDI transmission reception via the USB ter minal and MIDI terminals The relationship between the MIDI terminals and the USB terminal which can be used for transmitting receiving 32 channels 16 channels x 2 ports of the MIDI messages is as follows MIDI reception MIDI transmission USB TO USB TO MIDI IN jack HOST jack MIDI OUT jack HOST jack handling Merge Merge MIDI USB1 USB2 B 01 1 01 16 01 16 MIDUUS BASS display Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 200 These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback based on the note messages received via MIDI The note on off messages received at the chan nel s set to ON are recognized as the bass
375. y saved in the internal memory 1 Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display 2 Press the 8 A W RECORD EDIT button to call up the Edit display JSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT MUSIC amp Guiding Ligh CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR S DELETE BEAT RECORD TAN e N NEW FAVORITE s TEMPO SECTION gt GENRE OK Ze NAME CANCHE Convenient Music Finder feature 3 Edit the record as desired e Editing the song name keyword Style name Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display page 113 Changing the Tempo Press the 1 A W TEMPO button Memorizing the Section Intro Main Ending Use the 2 A W 4 A W buttons to select the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected This is useful for example when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro sec tion Editing the Genre Select the desired genre by using the 5 A W 6 A W GENRE buttons When creating a new genre press the 7 A W GENRE NAME button and input the genre name page 73 Deleting the Currently Selected Record Press the I DELETE RECORD button Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions Press the 8 W CANCEL button 4 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display press the E FAVORITE button to turn on the FAVORITE 5 Enter the edits
376. yed notes sound e You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony page 214 of the instrument When the maximum polyphony is exceeded the earliest played notes will stop sounding letting the latest played notes sound The keyboard volume is lower than the Song Style playback volume e The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low Raise the volume in the BALANCE display page 40 Keys do not sound at the proper pitch e Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on the operation display page 43 Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch The Scale parameter has probably been set to some thing other than Equal changing the tuning system of the keyboard Make sure Equal is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune display page 84 There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes played on the keyboard Some Voices have a looping sound Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches depending upon the voice e This is normal and is a result of the instrument s sam pling system Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers e This is normal Some voices have a pitch limit which when reached causes this type of pitch shift The Main display does not appear even when turning the power on e This may occur if a USB storage device has been installed to the instrument Installation of some USB stor age device may
377. ypes will be shown in the edit displays 1 Press the H FILTER button in the edit displays 2 Select the event type by using the 2 A W 5 A V buttons 3 Checkmark show or remove the checkmark for the selected item by using the 6 A W 7 A W buttons H ALL ONT Checkmarks for all event types I NOTE CHORD Selects only NOTE CHORD data II INVERT woo Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes In other words this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa A Press the EXIT button to execute the settings Pressing the C E buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below MAIN EE Call up the Main Filter display CIRE CHG d ser Call up the Control Change Filter display SIN dE Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display Editing System Exclusive Events SYS EX The explanations here apply to the SYS EX tab display in step 4 of the Basic Edit ing Operation on page 158 From this display you can edit recorded System Exclusive events which do not belong to a specific channel such as tempo and beat time signature The opera tions here are basically the same as those in the section Editing Note or Chord Events on page 163 System Events ScBar Score Start Bar Determines the top measure of a Song Tempo Determines the tempo value Time Time Signature Determines the time signature Key Key Signature Determines the k

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual  L`intertextualité vernienne dans "W ou Le souvenir d`enfance"  施工要領書  manual de instrucciones camara fotografica  FORGE Series User`s Manual  LG LMVM1935SB User's Manual  RPE - HPE 22-70 IT Cod 26609505 IT Rev 5 A2B.pmd  SUUNTO AMBIT3 RUN 1.5  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file